Pioneer DEH-P9100R Operation Manual
Operation Manual DEH-P9100R Manual de Operación ENGLISH FRANÃÂAIS DEUTSCH FRANÃÂAIS ITALIANO NEDERLANDS High power HDD/CD pla yer with âÂÂMemory Stickâ and FM/AM tuner Lecteur de disque dur/CD , âÂÂPuissance élevéeâÂÂ, avec âÂÂMemory Stickâ et syntoniseur FM/AM Operation Manual DEH-P90HDD Mode dâÂÂemploi
1 Contents Dear Customer ............................ 4 Key Finder .................................. 5 Before Using This Product .............. 6 Features .............................................................. 6 About this product .............................................. 7 About this manual .............................................. 7 Important .......................................................... 7 Precaution .......................................................... 7 After-sales service for Pioneer products ............ 8 About the XM READY mark ................................ 8 Resetting the microprocessor ............................ 9 About the demo modes ...................................... 9 About basic displays .......................................... 9 Remote controller and care .............................. 10 Using the steering remote controller ................ 11 Displaying and setting the clock ...................... 12 Detaching and replacing the front panel .......... 13 Basic Operation .......................... 14 Turning a source on or off ................................ 14 SOFT KEY operation ........................................ 14 Key guidance indicator .................................... 16 Tuner ...................................... 17 Display and indicators ...................................... 17 Basic operation ................................................ 17 Storing and recalling broadcast stations .......... 17 Tuner function menu ........................................ 18 Storing the strongest broadcast stations .......... 18 Selecting stations from the preset channel list ................................................ 18 Tuning in strong signals .................................. 18 Built-in CD Player ...................... 19 Display and indicators ...................................... 19 Basic operation ................................................ 19 Switching and scrolling the title ...................... 20 Built-in CD player function menu ...................... 20 Repeating play .................................................. 20 Playing tracks in random order ........................ 21 Scanning tracks of a CD .................................. 21 Selecting tracks from the track title list ............ 21 Pausing CD playback ........................................ 22 Entering disc titles ............................................ 22 MP3 Play .................................. 23 Display and indicators ...................................... 23 Basic operation ................................................ 23 Switching and scrolling the title ...................... 24 MP3 function menu .......................................... 24 Repeating play .................................................. 24 Playing tracks in random order ........................ 25 Scanning folders and tracks ............................ 25 Selecting tracks from the track title list ............ 26 Pausing MP3 playback .................................... 26 Music Server Recording ................ 27 Display and indicators ...................................... 27 Before recording .............................................. 27 Recording from the built-in CD ........................ 28 Switching CD information ................................ 29 Recording from a source other than the built-in CD ................................................ 29 Recording function menu ................................ 29 Selecting the recording range .......................... 30 Selecting the recording quality ........................ 30
Music Server Play ...................... 31 Display and indicators ...................................... 31 Basic operation ................................................ 31 Selecting the playlist mode .............................. 31 Using the custom playlist mode ...................... 32 Switching and scrolling the title ...................... 33 Music server function menu ............................ 34 Repeating play .................................................. 34 Playing tracks in random order ........................ 34 Scanning files and tracks ................................ 34 Selecting tracks from the track title list ............ 35 Selecting files from the playlist file title list ...... 35 Pausing music server playback ........................ 35 Entering titles .................................................. 36 Selecting the playlist mode .............................. 37 Deleting tracks and track information .............. 37 âÂÂMemory Stickâ Player ................ 39 Display and indicators ...................................... 39 Basic operation ................................................ 39 Switching and scrolling the title ...................... 40 âÂÂMemory Stickâ player function menu .............. 40 Repeating play .................................................. 40 Playing tracks in random order ........................ 40 Scanning tracks of a âÂÂMemory Stickâ .............. 41 Selecting tracks from the track title list ............ 41 Pausing âÂÂMemory Stickâ playback .................. 41 Erasing tracks from the âÂÂMemory Stickâ .......... 42 Multi-CD Player .......................... 43 Display and indicators ...................................... 43 50-disc multi-CD player .................................... 43 Basic operation ................................................ 43 Selecting a disc directly .................................... 43 Switching and scrolling the title ...................... 44 Multi-CD player function menu ........................ 44 Repeating play .................................................. 44 Playing tracks in random order ........................ 45 Scanning CDs and tracks ................................ 45 Selecting tracks from the track title list ............ 45 Selecting discs from the disc title list .............. 46 Pausing CD playback ........................................ 46 Entering disc titles ............................................ 46 Using compression and dynamic bass emphasis .................................................. 47 Using ITS memory .......................................... 47 DAB Tuner ................................ 49 Display and indicators ...................................... 49 Basic operation ................................................ 49 Storing and recalling services .......................... 50 Changing band ................................................ 50 Switching the display ...................................... 50 Switching the road traffic flash and transport flash on or off ............................................ 50 Dynamic label function .................................... 51 DAB tuner function menu ................................ 51 Setting the announcement support interruption .............................................. 52 Selecting services from the preset service list ................................................ 52 Selecting services from the available service list ................................................ 52 Searching the available PTY ............................ 52 2 ENGLISH ESPAÃÂOL DEUTSCH FRANÃÂAIS ITALIANO NEDERLANDS
3 Contents TV Tuner .................................. 53 Display and indicators ...................................... 53 Basic operation ................................................ 53 Storing and recalling broadcast stations .......... 53 Changing band ................................................ 54 TV tuner function menu .................................... 54 Selecting channels from the preset channel list ................................................ 54 Audio Adjustments ...................... 55 Adjusting the audio easily ................................ 55 Adjusting the audio finely ................................ 55 Extra functions ................................................ 55 Recalling equalizer curves ................................ 55 Audio menu ...................................................... 56 Using balance adjustment ................................ 56 Using loudness ................................................ 56 Using sound field control, octaver and BBE R sound .............................................. 56 Adjusting equalizer curves ................................ 57 Adjusting 13-band graphic equalizer ................ 57 Using automatic sound levelizer ...................... 58 Using position selector .................................... 58 Using time alignment ...................................... 59 Using subwoofer output .................................. 59 Using the high pass filter .................................. 60 Adjusting source levels .................................... 61 Using the auto-equalizer .................................. 61 Switching the digital attenuator ........................ 61 Creating the auto-equalizer curve .................... 61 Initial Settings .......................... 64 Initial settings menu ........................................ 64 Using reverse mode ........................................ 64 Using the feature demo .................................... 64 Switching the auxiliary setting .......................... 64 Switching the telephone muting/attenuation setting ...................................................... 65 Formatting the âÂÂMemory Stickâ ........................ 65 Setting the warning tone .................................. 66 Other Functions .......................... 67 Attenuating volume .......................................... 67 Changing the display form .............................. 67 Adjusting the brightness .................................. 67 Switching the dimmer setting .......................... 67 Selecting the wall paper pattern ...................... 67 Setting the entertainment display .................... 67 Using the AUX source ...................................... 69 Using the telephone muting/ attenuation .......... 69 Additional Information ................ 70 CD player and care .......................................... 70 MP3 files .......................................................... 71 âÂÂMemory Stickâ player and care ...................... 72 Understanding auto-equalizing error messages .................................................. 73 Understanding built-in CD player error messages .................................................. 74 Understanding music server error messages .................................................. 75 Understanding music server error messages when recording ........................................ 76 Understanding âÂÂMemory Stickâ player error messages ........................................ 77 Terms .............................................................. 79 Specifications .................................................. 81
4 ENGLISH ESPAÃÂOL DEUTSCH FRANÃÂAIS ITALIANO NEDERLANDS Selecting fine audio equipment such as the unit youâÂÂve just purchased is only the start of your musical enjoyment. Now itâÂÂs time to consider how you can maximize the fun and excitement your equipment offers. This manufacturer and the Electronic Industries AssociationâÂÂs Consumer Electronics Group want you to get the most out of your equipment by playing it at a safe level. One that lets the sound come through loud and clear without annoying blaring or distortionâÂÂand, most importantly, without affecting your sensitive hearing. Sound can be deceiving. Over time your hearing âÂÂcomfort levelâ adapts to higher volumes of sound. So what sounds âÂÂnormalâ can actually be loud and harmful to your hearing. Guard against this by setting your equipment at a safe level BEFORE your hearing adapts. To establish a safe level: ⢠Start your volume control at a low setting. ⢠Slowly increase the sound until you can hear it comfortably and clearly, and without distor- tion. Once you have established a comfortable sound level: ⢠Set the dial and leave it there. Taking a minute to do this now will help to prevent hearing damage or loss in the future. After all, we want you listening for a lifetime. W e W ant Y ou Listening F or A Lifetime Used wisely, your new sound equipment will provide a lifetime of fun and enjoyment. Since hearing damage from loud noise is often undetectable until it is too late, this manufacturer and the Electronic Industries AssociationâÂÂs Consumer Electronics Group recommend you avoid pro - longed exposure to excessive noise. This list of sound levels is included for your protection. Decibel Level Example 30 Quiet library, soft whispers 40 Living room, refrigerator, bedroom away from traffic 50 Light traffic, normal conversation, quiet office 60 Air conditioner at 20 feet, sewing machine 70 Vacuum cleaner, hair dryer, noisy restaurant 80 Average city traffic, garbage disposals, alarm clock at two feet. THE FOLLOWING NOISES CAN BE DANGEROUS UNDER CONSTANT EXPOSURE 90 Subway, motorcycle, truck traffic, lawn mower 100 Garbage truck, chain saw, pneumatic drill 120 Rock band concert in front of speakers, thunderclap 140 Gunshot blast, jet plane 180 Rocket launching pad Information courtesy of the Deafness Research Foundation.
5 Key Finder Head unit Steering remote controller A steering remote controller that enables remote operation of the head unit is supplied. Operation is the same as when using buttons on the head unit. 5 /â /2 /3 buttons SOURCE button OPEN button VOLUME RESET button Multi-function buttons BAND button BACK button NEXT button FUNCTION button 2 /3 buttons SOURCE button 5 /â buttons AUDIO button VOLUME Raise or lower the volume. BAND button ATT button This lets you quickly lower volume level (by about 90%). Press once more to return to the original volume level. REC button
Before Using This Product F eatures Music ser ver You can record music from the built-in CD play- er or from other audio devices and play them back on the music server. You can also orga- nize and edit favorite tracks, etc. Automatic title retrieval function using Gracenote CDDB (for encoding only) When music is recorded on the music server from the built-in CD, information such as the recording artist and track name is retrieved from the Gracenote CDDB database and displayed. (See page 33.) T ime stamp function When recording music on the music server, it is possible to add a recording date to the music data automatically using this productâÂÂs clock or calendar. (Please set the time and date before using this product.) (See page 12.) âÂÂMemor y Stickâ player The âÂÂMagicGate Memory Stickâ can be used for playback. CD playback It is possible to play back music stored on CD/CD-R/CD-RW formats. MP3 file playback It is possible to play back MP3 files recorded on CD-ROM/CD-R/CD-RW discs (recordings com- plying with ISO9660 Level 1/Level 2 standards). Correspondence to extended format is made with the following conditions. Joliet: Correspondence only to the 8.3 for- mat. Romeo: Correspondence to folder names with up to 64 characters and file names with up to 63 characters (including the extension). (See page 79.) DSP functions The audio feel of actually being at the music venue is recreated by means of such functions as the âÂÂAuto EqualizerâÂÂ, which measures pas- senger cabin audio characteristics and auto- matically compensates to optimize sound quali- ty, and the âÂÂTime Alignment FunctionâÂÂ, which achieves clear sound image positioning. Note: ⢠âÂÂMagicGateâÂÂ, âÂÂMagicGate Memory StickâÂÂ, âÂÂMemory Stickâ and their respective logos are the registered trademarks of Sony Corp. ⢠Windows is a brand name and the trademark of the Microsoft Corporation in the US, North America and other countries. When recording please pay attention to these points: ⢠Please may test recordings of recordings that can not be taken again. ⢠We cannot accept liability for data not recorded or lost due to the failure, improp- er operation or malfunction of this product. ⢠The use of recordings for purposes other than personal enjoyment, etc. are not per- mitted if they infringe copyrights and the rights of copyright claimants without prior consent. 6 ENGLISH ESPAÃÂOL DEUTSCH FRANÃÂAIS ITALIANO NEDERLANDS
7 Before Using This Product A bout this product The tuner frequencies on this product are allo- cated for use in North America. Use in other areas may result in improper reception. Products with voice control functions This productâÂÂs âÂÂMemory Stickâ and the music server have no voice control functions. Tracks recorded on the music server can not be called up by means of voice recognition. A bout this manual This product features a number of sophisticated functions ensuring superior reception and oper- ation. All are designed for the easiest possible use, but many are not self-explanatory. This operation manual is intended to help you bene- fit fully from their potential and to maximize your listening enjoyment. We recommend that you familiarize yourself with the functions and their operation by read- ing through the manual before you use this product. It is especially important that you read and observe the âÂÂPrecautionâ on this page and in other sections. This manual explains head unit operation. You can perform the same operations with the steer- ing remote controller. I mportant The serial number of this device is located on the bottom of this product. For your own securi- ty and convenience, be sure to record this num- ber on the enclosed warranty card. P recaution ⢠Keep this manual handy as a reference for operating procedures and precautions. ⢠Always keep the volume low enough for out- side sounds to be audible. ⢠Protect the product from moisture. ⢠If the battery is disconnected, the preset memory will be erased and must be repro- grammed. CAUTION: USE OF CONTROL OR ADJUSTMENT OR PERFOR- MANCE OF PROCEDURES OTHER THAN THOSE SPECI- FIED HEREIN MAY RESULT IN HAZARDOUS RADIATION EXPOSURE. CAUTION: THE USE OF OPTICAL INSTRU- MENTS WITH THIS PRODUCT WILL INCREASE EYE HAZARD.
A fter -sales service for Pioneer products Please contact the dealer or distributor from where you purchased the product for its after- sales service (including warranty conditions) or any other information. In case the necessary information is not available, please contact the companies listed below: Please do not ship your product to the compa- nies at the addresses listed below for repair without advance contact. For warranty information please see the Limited Warranty sheet included with your product. A bout the XM READY mark The âÂÂXM READYâ mark printed on the front panel of this product indicates that the Pioneer XM tuner (sold separately) can be controlled using this product. Please inquire of your dealer or nearest autho- rized Pioneer service station regarding the XM tuner that can be connected to this product. For operation of the XM tuner, refer to the XM tuner ownerâÂÂs manual. Note: ⢠The XM Satellite Radio is developing a new band of radio in the U.S.A. The system will use direct satellite-to-receiver broadcasting technology to provide listeners in their cars and at home with crystal-clear sound seam- lessly from coast to coast. XM will create and pack- age up to 100 channels of digital-quality music, news, sports, talk and childrenâÂÂs programming. ⢠When this product is connected to the XM tuner, only one external unit can be connected. (Refer to page 14.) ⢠When having this product serviced or repaired, data you have recorded may be lost. Because of the specifications of this product, there can be no compensation for the contents of the recorded data. Please be aware of this beforehand. ⢠There can be no compensation for record- ed data damaged or lost because of trou- bles or defects of this product. (At present, there is no correspondence to backup or repair of music data.) ⢠This product does not support additional hard disk installation or hard disk exchange by the customer. U.S.A. Pioneer Electronics (USA) Inc. CUSTOMER SUPPORT DIVISION P.O. Box 1760 Long Beach, CA 90801-1760 800-421-1404 CANADA Pioneer Electronics of Canada, Inc. CUSTOMER SATISFACTION DEPARTMENT 300 Allstate Parkway Markham, Ontario L3R OP2 (905) 479-4411 1-877-283-5901 8 ENGLISH ESPAÃÂOL DEUTSCH FRANÃÂAIS ITALIANO NEDERLANDS
9 Before Using This Product R esetting the microprocessor The microprocessor must be reset under the following conditions: When using this product for the first time after installation. When the machine fails to operate properly. When strange (incorrect) messages appear on the display. ⢠To reset the microprocessor, press RESET on the head unit with a pen tip or other pointed instrument. Precaution: ⢠After resetting, please set the time and date (see page 12). If the time and date are not set correctly, the music server and the âÂÂMemory Stickâ may not operate correctly. Note: ⢠The recorded contents of the music server are erased when the RESET button is pressed. A bout the demo modes This product features two demonstration modes. One is the reverse mode and the other is the feature demo mode. Reverse mode If you do not carry out an operation within about 30 seconds, screen indications will start to reverse, and then continue reversing every 10 seconds. Pressing the button 5 when power to this product is switched off while the ignition switch is set to ACC or ON cancels the reverse mode. Press the button 5 again to start the reverse mode. Feature demo The feature demo automatically starts when power to this product is switched off while the ignition switch is set to ACC or ON. Pressing the button 6 during feature demo operation can- cels the feature demo mode. Press the button 6 again to start the feature demo mode. Remember that if the feature demo continues operating when the car engine is switched OFF, it may drain battery power. Note: ⢠The red lead (ACC) of this product should be con- nected to a terminal coupled with ignition switch ON or OFF operations. If this is not done, the vehicle battery may be drained. ⢠When the source is off, you can check the location of âÂÂ5â and âÂÂ6â by turning on the feature demo. A bout basic displays This product is equipped with two forms of basic display. You can select the desired dis- play. FORM 1 FORM 2 Note: ⢠For details, refer to âÂÂChanging the display formâ on page 67.
10 ENGLISH ESPAÃÂOL DEUTSCH FRANÃÂAIS ITALIANO NEDERLANDS R emote controller and care Installing the lithium batter y ⢠Remove the cover on the back of the steering remote controller and insert the battery with the ( ) and (âÂÂ) poles pointing in the proper direction. Replacing the lithium batter y ⢠Remove the lithium battery. Precaution: ⢠Replace the battery with a CR2032 lithium battery. ⢠Replace the battery in the unit using a non metallic tapered instrument. W ARNING: ⢠Keep the lithium battery out of the reach of children. Should the battery be swallowed, immediately consult a doctor. CAUTION: ⢠Do not recharge, disassemble, heat or dis- pose of the battery in a fire. ⢠Use a CR2032 (3 V) lithium battery only. Never use other types of battery with this unit. ⢠Do not handle the battery with metallic tools. ⢠Do not store the lithium battery with metallic materials. ⢠When disposing of used batteries, please comply with governmental regulations or environmental public institutionâÂÂs rules that apply in your country/area. ⢠Always check carefully that you are loading the battery with its ( ) and (âÂÂ) poles facing in the proper directions.
11 Before Using This Product U sing the steering remote con- troller Precaution: ⢠Do not operate this unit while manipulating the steering wheel as this might result in a traffic acci- dent. ⢠If you have to operate this unit unavoidably when driving, pay careful attention to the road ahead to avoid the risk of being involved in a traffic accident. ⢠If any of the following problems occur, immediately stop using this unit and consult with the dealer from whom you purchased it: â the unit is smoking. â the unit is emitting an abnormal odor. â a foreign object has entered the unit. â liquid has been spilled on or into the unit. If you continue to use this unit without rectifying the problem, the unit may be damaged badly, resulting in a serious accident or fire. ⢠Do not leave this unit free (unattached) inside the car. When the car stops or turns a curve, the unit might drop on the floor. If the unit rolls under the brake pedal, it might prevent the driver from brak- ing properly, causing serious trouble. Be sure to fix this unit to the steering wheel. ⢠Do not disassemble or modify this unit. To do so may cause a malfunction. ⢠When VOLUME extends outward, the remote con- trol may not work properly. FUNCTION button and AUDIO button Operation of the FUNCTION button and the AUDIO button on the remote controller differs from the operation of the FUNC button and the AUDIO button on the head unit. When operat- ing the head unit, use the FUNC button and the AUDIO button to select the appropriate menu, then use the multi-function buttons to select the mode. When operating the remote controller, however, switch through the modes as described below to select the mode. FUNCTION button operation ⢠Press FUNCTION to select the desired mode (e.g., built-in CD player). Press FUNCTION repeatedly to switch between the following modes: RPT = RDM = SCAN = T.LIST = PAUSE = TTLin Note: ⢠Refer to âÂÂBuilt-in CD player function menuâ on page 20. AUDIO button operation ⢠Press AUDIO to select the desired mode. Press AUDIO repeatedly to switch between the following modes: F/B = LOUD = SFC = EQ1 = EQ2 = ASL = POSI = T.AL1 = T.AL2 = SW1 = SW2 = HPF F = HPF R = SLA = A.EQ = D.ATT Note: ⢠Refer to âÂÂAudio menuâ on page 56.
D isplaying and setting the clock You can turn the time display on or off and set the time. Setting the time display on or off 1. Press NEXT to display âÂÂCLKâÂÂ. Press NEXT until âÂÂCLKâ appears. 2. Press CLK and then press ON/OFF to turn the time display on. The light illuminates. When the time display is turned on, âÂÂTIMEâÂÂ, âÂÂDATEâ and âÂÂJUSTâ appear simultaneously. ⢠Press ON/OFF again to turn the time dis- play off. ⢠If you press BAND and exit the calendar and time mode, the time display will appear instead of the source name. Note: ⢠If you do not operate the function within about 60 seconds, the display is automatically returned. Off clock display When the time display is turned on, the calen- dar display appears with the time display when sources and the feature demo are off. Setting the date The calender display adjusted in this mode appears only when sources and the feature demo are off. 1. Press NEXT to display âÂÂCLKâÂÂ. Press NEXT until âÂÂCLKâ appears. 2. Press CLK and then press DATE to set the date. 3. Press 2 2 or 3 3 to switch between day, month and year. 4. Press 5 5 or â â to correct the date. Pressing 5 advances the day, month or year. Pressing â turns back the day, month or year. Setting the time 1. Press NEXT to display âÂÂCLKâÂÂ. Press NEXT until âÂÂCLKâ appears. 2. Press CLK and then press TIME to set the time. 3. Press 2 2 or 3 3 to switch between hour and minute. 4. Press 5 5 or â â to adjust the time. Pressing 5 advances the hour or minute. Pressing â turns back the hour or minute. Matching the time to a time signal 1. Press NEXT to display âÂÂCLKâÂÂ. Press NEXT until âÂÂCLKâ appears. 2. Press CLK and then press JUST to match the time to a time signal. ⢠If the minute is âÂÂ00â â âÂÂ29âÂÂ, the minutes are rounded down. (e.g., âÂÂ10:18â becomes âÂÂ10:00âÂÂ.) ⢠If the minute is âÂÂ30â â âÂÂ59âÂÂ, the minutes are rounded up. (e.g., âÂÂ10:36â becomes âÂÂ11:00âÂÂ.) Note: ⢠During date adjustment, âÂÂJUSTâ is not displayed. Time display 12 ENGLISH ESPAÃÂOL DEUTSCH FRANÃÂAIS ITALIANO NEDERLANDS
13 Before Using This Product D etaching and replacing the front panel W ARNING: ⢠Do not use with the front panel left open. If the front panel is left open, it may result in injury in the event of an accident. ⢠Do not drive with the front panel removed. If the front panel is left removed, it may result in injury in the event of an accident. Theft protection The front panel of the head unit is detachable to discourage theft. Precaution: ⢠Never use force or grip the display tightly when removing or replacing the front panel. ⢠Avoid subjecting the front panel to excessive shocks. ⢠Keep the front panel out of direct sunlight and high temperatures. Detaching the front panel 1. Press OPEN to open the front panel. 2. Slide the front panel toward you and remove it. Take care not to grip the front panel tightly or drop it. ⢠Never remove the front panel while the access lamp is lit, as otherwise data may be destroyed. (See page 39.) 3. Close the inner cover. 4. Use the protective case provided to store/carry the detached front panel. Replacing the front panel 1. Make sure the inner cover is closed. 2. Replace the front panel by clipping it into place. W arning tone If the front panel is not detached within five sec- onds after the ignition is turned off, the warning tone will sound to remind you to detach the front panel. Note: ⢠You can cancel the warning tone function. (Refer to page 66.) Release section
Basic Operation T urning a source on or off You can select the source you want to listen to. To switch to built-in CD player, load a CD in this product. (See page 19.) To switch to a âÂÂMemory Stickâ player, load a âÂÂMemory Stickâ in this product. (See page 39.) 1. Press SOURCE to select the desired source (e.g., tuner). Press SOURCE repeatedly to switch between the following sources: Built-in CD player (MP3) = TV tuner = Tuner = DAB tuner = Music server = âÂÂMemory Stickâ player = Multi-CD player = External unit 1 = External unit 2 = AUX 2. Press VOLUME to extend the VOLUME outward. ⢠When you press VOLUME, it extends out- ward so that it becomes easier to turn. To retract VOLUME, press it again. 3. Turn VOLUME to adjust the volume. 4. Press and hold SOURCE to turn the source off. Note: ⢠External unit refers to a Pioneer product (such as one available in the future) that, although incompat- ible as a source, enables control of basic functions by this product. Two external units can be con- trolled by this product, although âÂÂExternalâ is dis- played whether you select external unit 1 or external unit 2. When two external units are connected, the allocation of them to external unit 1 or external unit 2 is automatically set by this product. ⢠In the following cases, the sound source will not change: * When no product corresponding to the source is connected to this product. * No disc is set in this product. * No âÂÂMemory Stickâ is set in this product. * No magazine is set in the multi-CD player. * AUX (auxiliary setting) is set to off. (Refer to page 64.) ⢠When this productâÂÂs blue/white lead is connected to the carâÂÂs auto-antenna relay control terminal, the carâÂÂs auto-antenna extends when this productâÂÂs source is switched on. To retract the antenna, switch the source off. S OFT KEY operation SOFT KEY operation means that the function of a button changes as indicated on the display. The multi-function buttons provide SOFT KEY operation; the functions performed by the but- tons change according to the function or setting that has been selected. The explanations given in this manual are based on FORM 1 display. If you have selected FORM 2, the functions of some of the multi- function buttons may be different from those indicated in the manual. Important In this manual, for operations using the multi- function buttons the function displayed is used as the name of the function button. Multi-function buttons Function names â 3 â 14 ENGLISH ESPAÃÂOL DEUTSCH FRANÃÂAIS ITALIANO NEDERLANDS
15 Basic Operation Switching the function of the multi-func- tion buttons The â 3â indicator shows that the multi-function buttons have functions other than those current- ly displayed. When this indicator is visible, press NEXT to switch through the functions of the multi-function buttons. ⢠Press NEXT to display the desired func- tions (e.g., built-in CD player). Press NEXT repeatedly to switch between the following functions: ë Note: ⢠The number of functions or displays switched through will differ according to the source or menu selected. ⢠When no function is indicated for a button, that but- ton is not currently active. Example of multi-function button opera- tion Here the âÂÂrandom playâ function of the built-in CD player is used as an example to illustrate operation of the multi-function buttons. 1. Press NEXT to display âÂÂFUNCâÂÂ. Press NEXT repeatedly until âÂÂFUNCâ appears. 2. Press FUNC to enter the function menu. With the switch to the function menu, the functions of the multi-function buttons also change simultaneously. 3. Press RDM to select the random mode. 4. Press RDM to turn random play on. ⢠Press RDM again to turn random play off. The light goes off. 5. Press BACK to exit the function menu. When the function menu is exited, the func- tions of the multi-function buttons also change simultaneously. Note: ⢠You can also turn random play on or off by pressing 5 or â in the random mode. ⢠If you do not operate the function within about 30 seconds, the display is automatically returned. The difference between the BAND button and the BACK button BAND button Pressing the BAND button immediately cancels the current menu or mode, and returns to the basic displays. Note: ⢠When the source is the Tuner, TV tuner or DAB tuner and no menu or mode is selected, pressing the BAND button has the effect of switching bands. BACK button Pressing the BACK button cancels the current menu or mode and returns to the previously selected menu or mode. The light illuminates.
16 ENGLISH ESPAÃÂOL DEUTSCH FRANÃÂAIS ITALIANO NEDERLANDS Display example (e.g., built-in CD player) K ey guidance indicator This productâÂÂs display features key guidance indicators. These light to indicate which of the 5 /â /2 /3 buttons you can use. When youâÂÂre in the function menu, audio menu or the other menus, they also make it easy to see which 5 /â /2 /3 buttons you can use to switch func- tions on/off, switch repeat selections and per- form other operations. Note: ⢠In this manual, operation for each mode is given mainly in terms of the multi-function buttons. However, in each mode, when the key guidance indicators are lit it is also possible to use 5 /â /2 /3 to operate the mode. Key guidance indicators
17 T uner D isplay and indicators FORM 1 FORM 2 q Band w LOC indicator e Preset number r Frequency t Stereo indicator B asic operation 1. Press SOURCE to select the tuner. Press SOURCE until âÂÂTunerâ appears. 2. Press VOLUME to extend the VOLUME outward. ⢠When you press VOLUME, it extends out- ward so that it becomes easier to turn. To retract VOLUME, press it again. 3. Turn VOLUME to adjust the volume. 4. Press BAND to select the desired band. Press BAND repeatedly to switch between the following bands: FM-1 = FM-2 = FM-3 = AM 5. Press 2 2 or 3 3 to tune in to a station. The frequencies move up or down step by step. ⢠If you press and hold 2 or 3 for about one second and release, you can perform seek tuning. Seek tuning lets you skip broad- casting stations until a broadcast strong enough for good reception is found. ⢠If you press and hold 2 or 3, you can skip broadcasting stations. Seek tuning starts as soon as you release the button. Note: ⢠The stereo indicator â â lights when a stereo sta- tion is selected. S toring and recalling broadcast stations If you press any of the buttons 1 â 6, you can easily store up to six broadcast stations for later recall. Storing broadcast stations 1. Press NEXT to display âÂÂ1â â âÂÂ6âÂÂ. Press NEXT until âÂÂ1â â âÂÂ6â appears. 2. When you find a station that you want to store in memory, press and hold any of the buttons 1 â 6 until the preset number stops flashing. The station is stored in memory under the selected button. Note: ⢠Up to 18 FM stations, six for each of the three FM bands, and six AM stations can be stored in memo- ry. r qe w t rt qw e
18 ENGLISH ESPAÃÂOL DEUTSCH FRANÃÂAIS ITALIANO NEDERLANDS Recalling broadcast stations 1. Press NEXT to display âÂÂ1â â âÂÂ6âÂÂ. Press NEXT until âÂÂ1â â âÂÂ6â appears. 2. Press any of the buttons 1 â 6 to recall a station preset under that button. Note: ⢠You can also use 5 or â to recall broadcast sta- tions memorized in the buttons 1 â 6. T uner function menu The tuner function menu has the following func- tions: Note: ⢠If you do not operate the function within about 30 seconds, the display is automatically returned. S toring the strongest broadcast stations BSM (best stations memory) lets you automati- cally store the six strongest broadcast stations under the buttons 1 â 6. 1. Press FUNC to select the BSM mode. 2. Press BSM to turn the BSM on. âÂÂSearchingâ appears. The six strongest broadcast stations will be stored under the buttons 1 â 6 and in order of their signal strength. When finished, âÂÂSearchingâ disappears and the display switches to the preset channel list mode. ⢠To cancel the storage process before it is completed, press BSM again while âÂÂSearchingâ appears. 3. Press any of the buttons 1 â 6 to recall the desired station. S electing stations from the pre- set channel list The preset channel list lets you see the list of preset stations and select one of them to receive. 1. Press FUNC and then press chLIST to select the preset channel list mode. 2. Press any of the buttons 1 â 6 to recall the desired station. Note: ⢠You can also use 2, 3 and 5 to select and recall the desired station. T uning in strong signals Local seek tuning lets you tune in only those broadcast stations with sufficiently strong sig- nals for good reception. 1. Press FUNC and then press LOC to select the local mode. 2. Press LOC to set the local seek sensitivi- ty. Press LOC repeatedly to switch between the following settings: FM: Local OFF = Level 1 = Level 2 = Level 3 = Level 4 AM: Local OFF = Level 1 = Level 2 ⢠When the local mode is exited except for âÂÂLocal OFFâ is selected, âÂÂLOCâ appears on the basic display. Note: ⢠The âÂÂLevel 4â setting allows reception of only the strongest stations, while lower settings let you receive progressively weaker stations.
19 Built-in CD Player D isplay and indicators FORM 1 FORM 2 q Source name w Track number e Disc title r Play time t Track title B asic operation The built-in CD player plays one standard 12 cm or 8 cm (single) CD at a time. Do not use an adapter when playing an 8 cm CD. 1. Press OPEN to open the front panel. 2. Insert a CD into the CD loading slot. 3. Close the front panel. 4. Press VOLUME to extend the VOLUME outward. ⢠When you press VOLUME, it extends out- ward so that it becomes easier to turn. To retract VOLUME, press it again. 5. Turn VOLUME to adjust the volume. 6. Press 2 2 or 3 3 to select a track. Pressing 3 skips to the start of the next track. Pressing 2 once skips to the start of the cur- rent track. Pressing again will skip to the previous track. ⢠If you press and hold 2 or 3, you can per- form fast forward or reverse. 7. Press OPEN and then press CD EJECT to eject the CD. ⢠Be sure to close the front panel after removing the CD. W ARNING: ⢠Do not use with the front panel left open. If the front panel is left open, it may result in injury in the event of an accident. Note: ⢠You can select CD as the source by pressing SOURCE when a disc is loaded in this product. ⢠When the front panel is open, multi-function but- tons are not available. ⢠Do not insert anything other than a CD into the CD loading slot. ⢠A CD left partially inserted after ejection may incur damage or fall out. ⢠If a CD cannot be inserted fully or playback fails, make sure the recorded side is down. Press the CD EJECT and check the disc for damage before rein- serting it. ⢠If the built-in CD player cannot operate properly, an error message (such as âÂÂERROR-12âÂÂ) appears on the display. Refer to âÂÂUnderstanding built-in CD player error messagesâ on page 74. CD EJECT button CD loading slot et qw r er qw
S witching and scrolling the title When playing a CD TEXT disc, you can switch text display such as artist name and track title. With text longer than 32 letters, you can scroll to see the rest of the text. 1. Press TITLE to switch the title mode. 2. Press the corresponding button to dis- play the desired title. FORM 1 Button Operation D.TTL Displays disc title. D.ART Displays disc artist name. T.TTL Displays track title. T.ART Displays track artist name. THNDR Displays thunderbolt animation. SCROLL Scrolls the displayed title. FORM 2 Button Operation TTL1 Displays disc title and track title. TTL2 Displays disc title and disc artist name. TTL3 Displays track title and track artist name. SCROLL Scrolls the displayed title. Note: ⢠If you do not operate the function within about eight seconds, the display is automatically returned. ⢠You cannot use 2 or 3 to select a track in title mode. ⢠When you select the display form 2, the titles are displayed up to 24 letters long. ⢠A CD TEXT disc is a CD featuring recorded text information such as disc title, artist name and track title. ⢠If certain text information is not recorded on a CD TEXT disc, âÂÂNo ~â (e.g., âÂÂNo titleâÂÂ) is displayed. ⢠If you have not input disc titles, âÂÂNo titleâ is dis- played. B uilt-in CD player function menu The built-in CD player function menu has the following functions: Note: ⢠If you do not operate the function within about 30 seconds, the display is automatically returned. (When you select the disc title input mode (TTLin), the display is not returned automatically.) ⢠âÂÂT.LISTâ is displayed only when playing a CD TEXT disc. R epeating play Repeat play lets you hear the same track over again. 1. Press FUNC to select the repeat mode. 2. Press RPT to turn the repeat play on. The light illuminates. The track currently playing will play and then repeat. ⢠Press RPT again to turn repeat play off. ⢠When the repeat mode is exited while repeat play is on, âÂÂT.RPTâ appears on the basic display. Note: ⢠If you perform track search or fast forward/reverse, repeat play is automatically canceled. 20 ENGLISH ESPAÃÂOL DEUTSCH FRANÃÂAIS ITALIANO NEDERLANDS
21 Built-in CD Player P laying tracks in random order Random play lets you play back tracks on the CD in random order. 1. Press FUNC and then press RDM to select the random mode. 2. Press RDM to turn random play on. The light illuminates. Tracks will play in ran- dom order. ⢠Press RDM again to turn random play off. ⢠When the random mode is exited while random play is on, âÂÂRDMâ appears on the basic display. S canning tracks of a CD Scan play lets you hear the first 10 seconds of each track on the CD. 1. Press FUNC and then press SCAN to select the scan mode. 2. Press SCAN to turn scan play on. The light illuminates. The first 10 seconds of each track are played. ⢠When the scan mode is exited while scan play is on, âÂÂSCANâ appears on the basic display. 3. When you find the desired track, press SCAN to turn scan play off. The light goes off. The track will continue to play. ⢠If the scan mode is automatically canceled, select the scan mode again. Note: ⢠After scanning of a CD is finished, normal playback of the tracks will begin again. S electing tracks from the track title list The track title list lets you see the list of track titles on a CD TEXT disc and select one of them for playback. 1. Press FUNC and then press T.LIST to select the track title list mode. 2. Press NEXT to display the desired track title. Press NEXT until the desired track title appears. 3. Press the corresponding number button to select the desired track title. That selection will begin to play. Note: ⢠You can also use 2, 3 and 5 to select and play the desired track title. ⢠Only when playing a CD TEXT disc, you can switch to this mode.
P ausing CD playback Pause lets you temporarily stop playback of the CD. 1. Press FUNC and then press PAUSE to select the pause mode. 2. Press PAUSE to turn the pause on. The light illuminates. Play of the current track pauses. ⢠Press PAUSE again to turn the pause off. ⢠When the pause mode is exited while pause is on, âÂÂPAUSEâ is displayed in the basic display. Note: ⢠You can also turn pause on or off by pressing PAUSE in the following display. E ntering disc titles Disc title input lets you input up to 48 CD titles up to 10 letters long into the built-in CD player. If you input a CD title, the entered title is dis- played. For details of operation, refer to âÂÂEntering disc titlesâ on page 46 under âÂÂMulti-CD PlayerâÂÂ. Note: ⢠When playing a CD TEXT disc, if you switch to this mode, âÂÂNo title inputâ is displayed and you cannot input the title. ⢠After the titles for 48 discs have been entered, the data for a new disc will overwrite the oldest one. ⢠If you connect a multi-CD player, you can input disc titles for up to 100 discs. ⢠When a multi-CD player that does not support disc title functions is connected, you cannot enter disc titles in this product. 22 ENGLISH ESPAÃÂOL DEUTSCH FRANÃÂAIS ITALIANO NEDERLANDS
23 MP3 Play D isplay and indicators FORM 1 FORM 2 q Source name w MP3 indicator e Bit rate indicator r Track number t Folder name y Play time u File name B asic operation The built-in CD player can playback MP3 files recorded on CD-ROM discs. (See page 71.) 1. Press OPEN to open the front panel. 2. Insert a CD-ROM into the CD loading slot. 3. Close the front panel. 4. Press VOLUME to extend the VOLUME outward. ⢠When you press VOLUME, it extends out- ward so that it becomes easier to trun. To retract VOLUME, press it again. 5. Turn VOLUME to adjust the volume. 6. Press 5 or â to select a folder. ⢠You can not select a folder in which no MP3 file is recorded. 7. Press 2 2 or 3 3 to select a track. Pressing 3 skips to the start of the next track. Pressing 2 once skips to the start of the cur- rent track. Pressing again will skip to the previous track. ⢠If you press and hold 2 or 3, you can per- form fast forward or reverse. 8. Press OPEN and then press CD EJECT to eject the CD-ROM. ⢠Be sure to close the front panel after removing the CD-ROM. W ARNING: ⢠Do not use with the front panel left open. If the front panel is left open, it may result in injury in the event of an accident. Note: ⢠You can select MP3 as the source by pressing SOURCE when a CD-ROM is loaded in this product. ⢠When the front panel is open, multi-function but- tons are not available. ⢠Do not insert anything other than a CD into the CD loading slot. ⢠A CD left partially inserted after ejection may incur damage or fall out. ⢠If a CD-ROM cannot be inserted fully or playback fails, make sure the recorded side is down. Press the CD EJECT and check the disc for damage before reinserting it. ⢠If the built-in CD player cannot operate properly, an error message (such as âÂÂERROR-12âÂÂ) appears on the display. Refer to âÂÂUnderstanding built-in CD player error messagesâ on page 74. CD EJECT button CD loading slot tu qr w y ty qw e r
S witching and scrolling the title You can switch text display such as artist name and track title. With text longer than 32 letters, you can scroll to see the rest of the text. 1. Press TITLE to switch the title mode. 2. Press the corresponding button to dis- play the desired title. FORM 1 Button Operation FOLDER Displays folder name. FILE Displays file name. D.TTL Displays disc title. T.TTL Displays track title. ARTIST Displays track artist name. SCROLL Scrolls the displayed title. FORM 2 Button Operation F FIL Displays folder name and file name FIL T Displays file name and track title. D TRK Displays disc title and track title. TR ART Displays track title and track artist name. SCROLL Scrolls the displayed title. Note: ⢠If you do not operate the function within about eight seconds, the display is automatically returned. ⢠You cannot use 2 or 3 to select a track in title mode. ⢠When you select the display form 2, the titles are displayed up to 24 letters long. ⢠This product conforms to ISO9660 level 1 and level 2 standards. Correspondence to extended format is made with the following conditions. Joliet: Correspondence only to the 8.3 format. Romeo:Correspondence to folder names with up to 64 characters and file names with up to 63 characters (including the extension). (See page 79.) ⢠Only the titles entered with the ID3 tag will be dis- played for the disc title, the track title, and the artist name. ⢠If certain text information is not recorded on a MP3 file, âÂÂNo ~â (e.g., âÂÂNo titleâÂÂ) is displayed. MP3 function menu The MP3 function menu has the following func- tions: Note: ⢠If you do not operate the function within about 30 seconds, the display is automatically returned. (When you select the disc title input mode (TTLin), the display is not returned automatically.) ⢠When playing a CD-ROM disc, if you switch to the disc title input mode (TTLin), âÂÂNo title inputâ is dis- played and you cannot input the title. R epeating play When playing back MP3 files, there are three repeat play ranges: one-track repeat, folder repeat and disc repeat. 1. Press FUNC to select the repeat mode. 2. Press RPT to select the repeat range. Press RPT repeatedly to switch between the following repeat ranges: Track repeat (one-track repeat) = Folder repeat (folder repeat) = Disc repeat (disc repeat) ⢠When the repeat mode is exited, either âÂÂT.RPTâ or âÂÂFOLDERRPTâ may appear on the basic display. â âÂÂT.RPTâ appears while the one-track repeat is selected. â âÂÂFOLDERRPTâ appears while the folder repeat is selected. Continued overleaf. 24 ENGLISH ESPAÃÂOL DEUTSCH FRANÃÂAIS ITALIANO NEDERLANDS
25 MP3 Play Note: ⢠If you select other folders during repeat play, the repeat range changes to disc repeat. ⢠If you perform track search or fast forward/reverse during one-track repeat, the repeat range changes to folder repeat. ⢠Folder repeat plays back the tracks (MP3 files) in the current folder only. Tracks in sub-folders are not played back. P laying tracks in random order Random play lets you play back tracks in the current folder in random order. 1. Press FUNC and then press RDM to select the random mode. 2. Press RDM to turn random play on. The light illuminates. Tracks will play in ran- dom order. ⢠Press RDM again to turn random play off. ⢠When the random mode is exited while random play is on, âÂÂRDMâ appears on the basic display. Note: ⢠Random play plays back the tracks (MP3 files) in the current folder only. Tracks in sub-folders are not played back. ⢠When you select disc repeat, when random play of all tracks in the current folder has been completed, random play will continue on the next folder. S canning folders and tracks When you select folder repeat, scan play lets you hear the first 10 seconds of each track in the selected folder. When you select disc repeat, scan play lets you hear the first 10 sec- onds of the first track on each folder. 1. Select the repeat range. Refer to âÂÂRepeating playâ on page 24. 2. Press FUNC and then press SCAN to select the scan mode. 3. Press SCAN to turn scan play on. The light illuminates. The first 10 seconds of each track of the current folder (or the first track of each folder) are played. ⢠When the scan mode is exited while scan play is on, âÂÂSCANâ appears on the basic display. 4. When you find the desired track (or fold- er), press SCAN to turn scan play off. The light goes off. The track (or folder) will continue to play. ⢠If the scan mode is automatically canceled, select the scan mode again. Note: ⢠After track or folder scanning is finished, normal playback of the tracks will begin again. ⢠If you turn scan play on during one-track repeat, the repeat range changes to folder repeat.
S electing tracks from the track title list The track title list lets you see the list of track (or folder) titles on a CD-ROM disc and select one of them for playback. 1. Press FUNC and then press T.LIST to select the track title list mode. 2. Press NEXT to display the desired track (or folder) title. Press NEXT until the desired track (or fold- er) title appears. 3. Press the corresponding number button to select the desired track (or folder) title. That selection will begin to play. ⢠When you have selected a folder, a list of the titles of the tracks (or folder) in it can be viewed. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to select the desired track title. Note: ⢠You can also use 2, 3 and 5 to select and play the desired track title. ⢠By pressing âÂÂ, you can return to the previous list (the folder one level higher). ⢠The track title is displayed as the file name of the MP3 file. (It is not displayed as the track title in the ID3 tag.) ⢠At the time of playback of an MP3 file, the track title list always is displayed from âÂÂROOTâÂÂ. ⢠Folders containing only MP3 files which can not be played and folders containing no MP3 files also are displayed in the list. P ausing MP3 playback Pause lets you temporarily stop playback of the MP3. 1. Press FUNC and then press PAUSE to select the pause mode. 2. Press PAUSE to turn the pause on. The light illuminates. Play of the current track pauses. ⢠Press PAUSE again to turn the pause off. ⢠When the pause mode is exited while pause is on, âÂÂPAUSEâ is displayed in the basic display. Note: ⢠You can also turn pause on or off by pressing PAUSE in the following display. 26 ENGLISH ESPAÃÂOL DEUTSCH FRANÃÂAIS ITALIANO NEDERLANDS
27 Music Ser ver Recording D isplay and indicators During record standby During recording q Recording source name w CD track number e Recording range indicator r CD information t Recording bit rate indicator y Remaining recordable time u Music server track number i Recording display Note: ⢠The remaining recordable time is calculated based on the bit rate currently selected. B efore recording ⢠Even when the remaining recordable time of the music server is displayed as âÂÂ00H00MâÂÂ, recording is possible until âÂÂM.Server fullâ is displayed. ⢠If the time remaining is shorter than the total time of CD or tracks to be recorded, âÂÂTime shortâ is displayed, allowing recording for only remaining time of the music server. ⢠Recordings are in stereo; mono recordings are not possible. ⢠When recording CD TEXT discs, the charac- ter information stored on the CD TEXT disc can not be recorded on the music server. ⢠You may erase recordings. (See page 37.) ⢠Recording standby is cancelled in the follow- ing cases: * When the power is switched off. * On ignition of the car engine. * When the recording source is changed. * When BAND is pressed. * When a CD is inserted into the built-in CD player during recording from other device. * When a record source device is disconnect- ed (such as during Muti-CD recording.) ⢠Recording is cancelled in the following cases: * On ignition of the car engine. * When REC is pressed. * When a record source device is disconnect- ed (such as during Muti-CD recording.) * When there is an error message from the music server or built-in CD player. (See pages 74 to 76.) * When a skip has been repeated 3 times at the same position during recording from the built-in CD player. ⢠Track skip function is disabled during record standby or recording. Unnecessary tracks can be erased after recording. PRECAUTION: ⢠Please may test recordings of recordings that can not be taken again. ⢠We cannot accept liability for data not record- ed or lost due to the failure, improper opera- tion or malfunction of this product. ⢠The use of recordings for purposes other than personal enjoyment, etc. are not permitted if they infringe copyrights and the rights of copy- right claimants without prior consent. ⢠This product is not intended for recording from radio. rt y u qw i e rt y u qw e
Digital and analog recording This product is intended for digital recording from the built-in CD player to the music server. Recording from sources other than the built-in CD, such as multi-CD or AUX, will be recorded in analog. While digital recordings can be made with less loss of quality, we recommend record- ing from the built-in CD. ⢠It is not possible to digitally copy music to the music server if it was digitally recorded from CDs (such as CD-R). This is set by SCMS, the Serial Copying Management System, which has been devel- oped to prevent serial copies (copies of copies). (See page 80.) ⢠Analog recordings are stopped automatically after two hours. To continue recording to the same playlist file, press REC and restart the recording. Bit rate The bit rate can be selected for each recording. This alters the sound quality and recording time. (See page 30.) Recording range The range of recording from the built-in CD or multi-CD player is selectable. (See page 30.) R ecording from the built-in CD Recording from CD-ROM is not possible. Not all recordings may be made from CD-R, CD-RW and other formats for reasons of copyright pro- tection. (SCMS) (See page 80.) 1. Press OPEN to open the front panel. 2. Insert a CD into the CD loading slot. 3. Close the front panel. 4. Press and hold REC until you have the record standby status. âÂÂReadyâ and âÂÂM.Server pauseâ appear in sequence and the product goes into the record standby status. 5. Press FUNC to select the record mode setting mode. 6. Press R.MODE to select the recording range. Press R.MODE repeatedly to switch between the following ranges: Disc (disc recording) = Track (one-track recording) ⢠Disc (disc recording) will record the disc you are listening to from the current track to the end of the disc. When disc recording has been interrupted, continued recording from the interrupted track is possible. (Refer to âÂÂSelecting the recording rangeâ on page 30.) ⢠With Track (one-track recording), you can only record the track you are currently lis- tening to. 7. Press BAND to cancel the record mode setting mode. 8. Press 2 2 or 3 3 to select the desired track. 9. Press REC to start the recording. Recording starts automatically from the beginning of the track being listened to. ⢠When the recording ends, âÂÂM.Server pauseâ is displayed and the product goes into the record standby status. 10. Press BAND to cancel the record standby status. Continued overleaf. CD EJECT button CD loading slot 28 ENGLISH ESPAÃÂOL DEUTSCH FRANÃÂAIS ITALIANO NEDERLANDS
29 Music Ser ver Recording Note: ⢠If REC is pressed during recording, recording is ter- minated. ⢠In the event of skipping, the recording will revert to the beginning of the track (retry function). ⢠On record standby, the current track is repeated. This is cancelled when recording begins. ⢠Even if the random, track scan and pause are set to on, the current track is repeated when the mode is switched to the record standby status. When the recording is started, the repeat play is canceled. ⢠Fast forward and fast reverse do not operate when the product is on record standby. S witching CD information When recording from the built-in CD, you can switch CD information during record standby or recording. ⢠Press DISP to change the CD information display. Press DISP repeatedly to switch between the following displays: Recording range âÂÂDiscâ and âÂÂContinueâ Play time = remaining disc time = total disc time Recording range âÂÂTrackâ Play time = remaining track time = total track time R ecording from a source other than the built-in CD This product can make analog recordings from other equipment. 1. Press SOURCE to select the desired source. Press SOURCE until the desired source appears. 2. Press and hold REC until you have the record standby status. âÂÂReadyâ and âÂÂM.Server pauseâ appear in sequence and the product goes into the record standby status. ⢠When performing multi-CD recording, you can set the recording mode (refer to âÂÂSelecting the recording rangeâ on page 30) and the bit rate (refer to âÂÂSelecting the recording qualityâ on page 30). ⢠When recording from a source other than the multi-CD (such as a TV tuner or AUX output, etc.), the bit rate should be set only as specified (refer to âÂÂSelecting the record- ing qualityâ on page 30.) 3. Press REC to start recording. Recording begins as soon as REC is pressed. ⢠When performing multi-CD recording, press 2 or 3 right before pressing REC to select the track. 4. Press REC again to stop the recording. âÂÂReadyâ and âÂÂM.Server pauseâ appear in sequence and the product goes into the record standby status. 5. Press BAND to cancel the record standby status. Note: ⢠If the CD sound from the source CD falls below a certain level, a track number will be added automat- ically. By pressing 5 during recording, it is possible to add a track number manually (up to 400). ⢠Depending on the recording source CD, the unit may determine a track ends in the middle or may not be able to determine the end of a track. ⢠If the CD skips during recording, it will be recorded as is. ⢠When recording where there is a lot of vibration, such as on the road, track numbers will be added automatically. R ecording function menu The recording function menu has the following functions: Note: ⢠If you do not operate the function within about 30 seconds, the display is automatically returned. ⢠The record mode setting mode (R.MODE) is dis- played for settings only for CD recording.
S electing the recording range It is possible to select the recording range when recording from a CD. 1. In record standby, press FUNC to select the recording mode setting mode. 2. Press R.MODE to select the recording range. Press R.MODE repeatedly to switch between the following recording ranges: Built-in CD recording Disc (disc recording) = (Continue (continu- ous recording)) = Track (one-track recording) ⢠Disc (disc recording) will record the disc you are listening to from the current track to the end of the disc. ⢠Continue (continuous recording) continues recording from the interrupted disc record- ing to the last track of the CD. (Even when a track other than the interrupted one is selected, recording will be performed from the interrupted track.) ⢠With Track (one-track recording), you can only record the track you are currently lis- tening to. Note: ⢠When Disc (disc recording) has been interrupted, and record standby is performed again, Continue (continuous recording) will be performed, except in the following cases. * In case of interruption because of an error. * When the CD has been removed after the interrup- tion. * In case of recording with âÂÂTrackâ after the inter- ruption. * When the interruption has been caused by discon- necting the yellow lead ( Battery) of this product. ⢠With Disc (disc recording), you cannot select and record only the track to be recorded. Unwanted tracks can be deleted from the music server after recording. (See page 37.) Multi-CD Recording All (all tracks recording) = Track (one-track recording) ⢠With Track (one-track recording), you can only record the track you are currently lis- tening to (not from the beginning of the track). ⢠On All (all tracks recording) you can record all tracks from the one you are listening to until you stop recording. (No rewind to the beginning of track or disc.) S electing the recording quality When recording it is possible to select the sound quality. The larger the recording bit rate number, the higher the sound quality, although the total recording time will be shorter. 1. In record standby, press FUNC and then press RATE to select the recording bit rate mode. 2. Press RATE to select the recording bit rate. Press RATE repeatedly to switch between the following setting: 132 kbps = 105 kbps Note: ⢠The bit rate allows digital and analog recordings to be recorded in separate settings. (There is no need to change the setting when you wish to keep the bit rate previously set.) 30 ENGLISH ESPAÃÂOL DEUTSCH FRANÃÂAIS ITALIANO NEDERLANDS
31 Music Ser ver Play D isplay and indicators FORM 1 FORM 2 q Source name w Bit rate indicator e Track number r Playlist file name t Play time y Track title B asic operation It is possible to play back tracks recorded on the music server. 1. Press SOURCE to select the music serv- er. Press SOURCE until âÂÂMusic Serverâ appears. 2. Press VOLUME to extend the VOLUME outward. ⢠When you press VOLUME, it extends out- ward so that it becomes easier to turn. To retract VOLUME, press it again. 3. Turn VOLUME to adjust the volume. 4. Press 5 5 or â â to select a playlist file. 5. Press 2 2 or 3 3 to select a track. Pressing 3 skips to the start of the next track. Pressing 2 once skips to the start of the cur- rent track. Pressing again will skip to the previous track. ⢠If you press and hold 2 or 3, you can per- form fast forward or reverse. Note: ⢠If no music is recorded on the music server, âÂÂNo audioâ is displayed. ⢠If the music server cannot operate properly, an error message such as âÂÂERROR-30â is displayed. Refer to âÂÂUnderstanding music server error mes- sagesâ on page 75. ⢠When ACC ON/OFF is performed during internal processing, âÂÂProcessingâ may be displayed. In this case, please wait until the display goes out. S electing the playlist mode The playlist mode uses playlist files that group tracks according to the recording conditions at the time of recording. The mode allows you to play back only desired groups of tracks. 1. Press BAND to select the desired playlist mode. Press BAND repeatedly to switch between the following modes: All (each recording date) = Digital (digital recordings) = Analog (analog recordings) = Artist (artist) = Custom (custom) Note: ⢠If you switch to playlist mode when nothing has been recorded, âÂÂNo PlayListâ or âÂÂNo audioâ is dis- played. ry qe t rt qw e
Playlist files Playlist files are lists of information on groups of tracks, containing such details as recording date, digital/analog and location. For every track, the playlist will contain the date of record- ing, whether it is digital, and the artistâÂÂs name, etc. (Music data is stored only in the playlist file for each recording date.) ⢠Playlist files for each recording date store tracks and the information on each track respectively. ⢠In playlist files for digital recordings, the infor- mation for each track is stored separately. (When the recording range is âÂÂDiscâ or âÂÂContinueâÂÂ, the entire list becomes one playlist file, and when the recording range is âÂÂTrackâÂÂ, the range from the start of recording to the end becomes one playlist file.) ⢠In playlist files for analog recordings, the infor- mation for each track is stored separately. ⢠Artist playlist files store track information by artist, if there is an artistâÂÂs name in the data- base when making digital recordings. ⢠Custom playlist files can be created contain- ing favorite tracks. U sing the custom playlist mode The custom playlist mode allows you to create playlist files to record and play back your favorite tracks. You can create six custom playlist files. Recording tracks in a custom playlist file 1. Press NEXT to display âÂÂCSTM1â â âÂÂCSTM6âÂÂ. Press NEXT until âÂÂCSTM1â â âÂÂCSTM6â appears. 2. When you find a track that you want to store in a custom playlist file, press and hold any of the buttons CSTM1 â CSTM6 until âÂÂFinished recordingâ appears. The track is stored in memory under the selected button. ⢠When a track has been selected from cus- tom playlist files and the button shown reversed is pressed for two seconds or longer, the track being played will be delet- ed. Note: ⢠You can record up to 99 tracks in a playlist file. ⢠The tracks are played back in the order in which they are stored. ⢠If an existing track is recorded again, it will be duplicated. Selecting a custom playlist file directly 1. Press NEXT to display âÂÂCSTM1â â âÂÂCSTM6âÂÂ. Press NEXT until âÂÂCSTM1â â âÂÂCSTM6â appears. 2. Press any of the buttons CSTM1 â CSTM6 to select the desired custom playlist file. Note: ⢠You can select the desired custom playlist file by pressing 5 or â . Deleting a track from a custom playlist file 1. Press NEXT to display âÂÂCSTM1â â âÂÂCSTM6âÂÂ. Press NEXT until âÂÂCSTM1â â âÂÂCSTM6â appears. 2. Press any of the buttons CSTM1 â CSTM6 to select the custom playlist file from which you wish to delete a track. 3. Press 2 2 or 3 3 to select the desired track. 4. Press and hold the button with the same number of the selected custom playlist file until âÂÂFinished erasingâ appears. The track currently playing is erased from the custom playlist file. 32 ENGLISH ESPAÃÂOL DEUTSCH FRANÃÂAIS ITALIANO NEDERLANDS
33 Music Ser ver Play S witching and scrolling the title You can switch the text display to view such information as artist name and track title. With text longer than 32 letters, you can scroll to see the rest of the text. ⢠When recording from the built-in CD it is pos- sible to take an artist name or track title, etc. from the built-in Gracenote CDDB database. (It is not possible to retrieve a title if there is no information on the CD in the database.) 1. Press TITLE to switch the title mode. 2. Press the corresponding button to dis- play the desired title. FORM 1 Button Operation P.L TTL Displays playlist file title. T.TTL Displays track title. ARTIST Displays track artist name. SCROLL Scrolls the displayed title. FORM 2 Button Operation P.L TTL Displays playlist file title and track title. TR ART Displays track title and track artist name. SCROLL Scrolls the displayed title. Note: ⢠If you do not operate the function within about eight seconds, the display is automatically returned. ⢠You cannot use 5 /â /2 /3 to select a playlist file or track in title mode. ⢠When you select the display form 2, the titles are displayed up to 24 letters long. ⢠If you have not input track titles, âÂÂNo titleâ is dis- played. Gracenote CDDB Gracenote is CDDB, Inc. d/b/a âÂÂGracenote.â CD-related data from Gracenote CDDB î , copy- right 1999, 2000, 2001 Gracenote. Gracenote CDDB Client Software, copyright 1999, 2000, 2001 CDDB, Inc. U.S. Patents Numbers #5,987,525; #6,061,680; #6,154,773, and other patents issued or pending. CDDB is a registered trademark of Gracenote. The Gracenote logo and the Gracenote CDDB logo are trademarks of Gracenote. Music Recognition Service and MRS are service marks of Gracenote. Music recognition technology and meta-data- base are provided by Gracenote and the Gracenote CDDB î Music Recognition Service. Gracenote is the industry standard in music recognition technology and related content delivery. For more information go to www.gracenote.com. Note: ⢠Pioneer is not responsible for Gracenote and the Gracenote CDDB service.
M usic ser ver function menu The music server function menu has the follow- ing functions: Note: ⢠If you do not operate the function within about 30 seconds, the display is automatically returned. (When you select title input modes (P.L.in, TRKin, ARTin), the display is not returned automatically.) R epeating play There are three repeat play ranges for the music server: one-track repeat, playlist file repeat and playlist mode repeat. 1. Press FUNC to select the repeat mode. 2. Press RPT to select the repeat range. Press RPT repeatedly to switch between the following repeat ranges: Track repeat (one-track repeat) = PlayList repeat (playlist file repeat) = PlayList mode repeat (playlist mode repeat) ⢠When the repeat mode is exited, either âÂÂT.RPTâ or âÂÂP.LISTRPTâ may appear on the basic display. â âÂÂT.RPTâ appears while the one-track repeat is selected. â âÂÂP.LISTRPTâ appears while the playlist file repeat is selected. Note: ⢠If you select other playlist files during repeat play, the repeat range changes to playlist mode repeat. ⢠If you perform track search or fast forward/reverse during one-track repeat, the repeat range changes to playlist file repeat. P laying tracks in random order Random play lets you play back tracks in the playlist file in random order. 1. Press FUNC and then press RDM to select the random mode. 2. Press RDM to turn random play on. The light illuminates. Tracks will play in ran- dom order. ⢠Press RDM again to turn random play off. ⢠When the random mode is exited while random play is on, âÂÂRDMâ appears on the basic display. Note: ⢠When you select the playlist mode repeat, when the random play of all tracks in the current file has been completed, random play will continue on the next file. S canning files and tracks When you select playlist file repeat, scan play lets you hear the first 10 seconds of each track in the selected playlist file. When you select playlist mode repeat, scan play lets you hear the first 10 seconds of the first track in each playlist file. 1. Select the repeat range. Refer to âÂÂRepeating playâ on this page. 2. Press FUNC and then press SCAN to select the scan mode. 3. Press SCAN to turn scan play on. The light illuminates. The first 10 seconds of each track in the current playlist file (or the first track of each playlist file) are played. ⢠When the scan mode is exited while scan play is on, âÂÂSCANâ appears on the basic display. Continued overleaf. 34 ENGLISH ESPAÃÂOL DEUTSCH FRANÃÂAIS ITALIANO NEDERLANDS
35 Music Ser ver Play 4. When you find the desired track (or playlist file), press SCAN to turn scan play off. The light goes off. The track (or playlist file) will continue to play. ⢠If the scan mode is automatically canceled, select the scan mode again. Note: ⢠After track or playlist file scanning is finished, nor- mal playback of the tracks will begin again. ⢠If you turn scan play on during one-track repeat, the repeat range changes to playlist file repeat. S electing tracks from the track title list The track title list lets you see the list of track titles in a playlist file and select one of them for playback. 1. Press FUNC and then press T.LIST to select the track title list mode. 2. Press NEXT to display the desired track title. Press NEXT until the desired track title appears. 3. Press the corresponding number button to select the desired track title. That selection will begin to play. Note: ⢠You can also use 2, 3 and 5 to select and play the desired track title. ⢠If you have not input track titles, âÂÂNo T.Titleâ is dis- played. ⢠When the playlist file changes, the track title list mode will be cancelled automatically. S electing files from the playlist file title list The playlist file title list lets you see the list of playlist file titles in a playlist mode and select one of them for playback. 1. Press FUNC and then press P.LIST to select the playlist file title list mode. 2. Press NEXT to display the desired playlist file title. Press NEXT until the desired playlist file title appears. 3. Press the corresponding number button to select the desired playlist file title. That selection will begin to play. Note: ⢠You can also use 2, 3 and 5 to select and play the desired playlist file title. ⢠If you have not input playlist file titles, âÂÂNo titleâ is displayed. ⢠If nothing is recorded on the music server, âÂÂNo audioâ is displayed. P ausing music ser ver playback Pause lets you temporarily stop playback of the music server. 1. Press FUNC and then press PAUSE to select the pause mode.
2. Press PAUSE to turn pause on. The light illuminates. Play of the current track pauses. ⢠Press PAUSE again to turn pause off. ⢠When the pause mode is exited while pause is on, âÂÂPAUSEâ is displayed in the basic display. Note: ⢠You can also turn pause on or off by pressing PAUSE in the following display. E ntering titles The playlist file title, track title and track artistâÂÂs name can each be up to 20 characters for entry into the music server. ⢠When the playlist file changes while entering a title, the title input mode will be cancelled automatically. ⢠If you retrieve a title of over 21 characters from the built-in database, this product will edit the entry and delete all characters beyond 21. ⢠If you edit a title from the built-in database, some characters on the title input display may become blank. Entering playlist file titles 1. Press 5 5 or â â to play a playlist file you want to enter the title. 2. Press FUNC and NEXT and then press P.L.in to select the playlist file title input mode. Refer to âÂÂEntering disc titlesâ on page 46, and perform procedures 3 to 7 in the same way. Entering track titles 1. Press FUNC and NEXT and then press TRKin to select the track title input mode. 2. Press 2 2 or 3 3 to play a track you want to enter the title. 3. Press 5 5 to switch the track title input dis- play. Refer to âÂÂEntering disc titlesâ on page 46, and perform procedures 3 to 7 in the same way. Note: ⢠When entering a track title, the track title will be given to the intended track, even in case of change to the next track. Entering track artist names 1. Press FUNC and NEXT and then press ARTin to select the track artist name input mode. 2. Press 2 2 or 3 3 to play a track you want to enter the artist name. 3. Press 5 5 to switch the artist name input display. Refer to âÂÂEntering disc titlesâ on page 46, and perform procedures 3 to 7 in the same way. Note: ⢠When entering an artistâÂÂs name, the artistâÂÂs name will be given to the intended track, even in case of change to the next track. ⢠The artistâÂÂs name entered with this product will not be recorded in the artist playlist file. 36 ENGLISH ESPAÃÂOL DEUTSCH FRANÃÂAIS ITALIANO NEDERLANDS
37 Music Ser ver Play S electing the playlist mode In playlist mode, a playlist file is used to distin- guish a group of tracks that have been defined as a group when recorded. This mode allows you to play back the tracks you want to hear as a group. (See page 31.) 1. Press FUNC and NEXT and then press P.MODE to select the playlist mode selec- tion mode. 2. Press P.MODE to select the desired playlist mode. Press P.MODE repeatedly to switch between the following mode: All (each recording date) = Digital (digital recordings) = Analog (analog recordings) = Artist (artist) = Custom (custom) Note: ⢠If you switch to playlist mode when nothing has been recorded, âÂÂNo PlayListâ or âÂÂNo audioâ is dis- played. D eleting tracks and track infor- mation In playlist mode it is possible to delete tracks and track information recorded in playlist mode. However, in âÂÂAllâ mode, the track data is delet- ed along with the track information. With the âÂÂAllâ mode, the confirmation screen will show other items than those selected, so always veri- fy this when using this mode. When selecting âÂÂAllâ When selecting other than âÂÂAllâ Erasing a track from playlist file Precaution: ⢠Once a track is erased, it can not be restored. Always check the confirmation screen before eras- ing. 1. Press 5 5 or â â to select the desired playlist file. 2. Press FUNC and then press NEXT twice. 3. Press ERStrk to select the one-track erase mode. 4. Press 2 2 or 3 3 to select the desired track. 5. Press 5 5 to erase the currently playing track from the playlist file. 6. Press 2 2 and then press 5 5 to select âÂÂYESâÂÂ. ⢠To prevent erasure of the track, press 3 3 and 5 5 and select âÂÂNOâÂÂ. Note: ⢠When the playlist file changes, the one-track erase mode will be cancelled automatically. ⢠You can not adjust the volume while âÂÂYESâ is selected and during erasing.
Erasing a playlist file from playlist mode Precaution: ⢠Once a playlist file is erased, it can not be restored. Always check the confirmation screen before eras- ing. 1. Press 5 5 or â â to select the playlist file you want to erase from playlist mode. 2. Press FUNC and then press NEXT twice. 3. Press ERSpl to select the playlist file erase mode. 4. Press 5 5 to erase the selected playlist file from playlist mode. 5. Press 2 2 and then press 5 5 to select âÂÂYESâÂÂ. ⢠To prevent erasure of the playlist file, press 3 3 and 5 5 and select âÂÂNOâÂÂ. Note: ⢠You can not adjust the volume while âÂÂYESâ is selected and during erasing. 38 ENGLISH ESPAÃÂOL DEUTSCH FRANÃÂAIS ITALIANO NEDERLANDS
39 âÂÂMemor y Stickâ Player D isplay and indicators FORM 1 FORM 2 q Source name w Bit rate indicator e Track number r Track title t Play time y Track artist name B asic operation The âÂÂMemory Stickâ player plays one âÂÂMagicGate Memory Stick (MG Memory Stick)â at a time. (See page 72.) 1. Press OPEN to open the front panel. 2. Insert a âÂÂMemory Stickâ into the MS load- ing slot until it clicks into position. 3. Close the front panel. 4. Press VOLUME to extend the VOLUME outward. ⢠When you press VOLUME, it extends out- ward so that it becomes easier to turn. To retract VOLUME, press it again. 5. Turn VOLUME to adjust the volume. 6. Press 2 2 or 3 3 to select a track. Pressing 3 skips to the start of the next track. Pressing 2 once skips to the start of the cur- rent track. Pressing again will skip to the previous track. ⢠If you press and hold 2 or 3, you can per- form fast forward or reverse. 7. Press OPEN and then press MS EJECT to eject the âÂÂMemory StickâÂÂ. ⢠The access lamp lights while data are being written. Never remove the âÂÂMemory Stickâ while the access lamp is lit, as other- wise data may be destroyed. ⢠Be sure to close the front panel after removing the âÂÂMemory StickâÂÂ. W ARNING: ⢠Do not use with the front panel left open. If the front panel is left open, it may result in injury in the event of an accident. Note: ⢠You can select âÂÂMemory Stickâ as the source by pressing SOURCE when a âÂÂMemory Stickâ is loaded in this product. ⢠When the front panel is open, multi-function but- tons are not available. ⢠Do not insert anything other than a âÂÂMemory Stickâ into the MS loading slot. ⢠A âÂÂMemory Stickâ left partially inserted after ejec- tion may incur damage or fall out. ⢠If the âÂÂMemory Stickâ player cannot operate proper- ly, an error message (such as âÂÂERROR-30âÂÂ) appears on the display. Refer to âÂÂUnderstanding âÂÂMemory Stickâ player error messagesâ on page 77. ⢠During playback of music data with a limited num- ber of playbacks, fast forward and reverse are not possible, so that the number of playbacks can be managed correctly. ⢠When TA interruption occurs during playback of music data with a limited number of playbacks, the number of playbacks is decreased by one. This can be prevented by setting TA interruption to OFF in advance. Access lamp MS EJECT button MS loading slot ry qe t rt qw e
S witching and scrolling the title You can switch text display such as artist name and track title. With text longer than 32 letters, you can scroll to see the rest of the text. 1. Press TITLE to switch the title mode. 2. Press the corresponding button to dis- play the desired title. FORM 1 Button Operation T.TTL Displays track title. ARTIST Displays track artist name. THNDR Displays thunderbolt animation. SCROLL Scrolls the displayed title. FORM 2 Button Operation SCROLL Scrolls the displayed title. Note: ⢠If you do not operate the function within about eight seconds, the display is automatically returned. ⢠You cannot use 2 or 3 to select a track in title mode. ⢠When you select the display form 2, the titles are displayed up to 24 letters long. ⢠If certain text information is not recorded on a âÂÂMemory StickâÂÂ, âÂÂNo ~â (e.g., âÂÂNo titleâÂÂ) is dis- played. âÂÂM emor y Stickâ player function menu The âÂÂMemory Stickâ player function menu has the following functions: Note: ⢠If you do not operate the function within about 30 seconds, the display is automatically returned. R epeating play Repeat play lets you hear the same track over again. 1. Press FUNC to select the repeat mode. 2. Press RPT to turn the repeat play on. The light illuminates. The track currently playing will play and then repeat. ⢠Press RPT again to turn repeat play off. ⢠When the repeat mode is exited while repeat play is on, âÂÂT.RPTâ appears on the basic display. Note: ⢠If you perform track search or fast forward/reverse, repeat play is automatically canceled. P laying tracks in random order Random play lets you play back tracks on the âÂÂMemory Stickâ in random order. 1. Press FUNC and then press RDM to select the random mode. 2. Press RDM to turn random play on. The light illuminates. Tracks will play in ran- dom order. ⢠Press RDM again to turn random play off. ⢠When the random mode is exited while random play is on, âÂÂRDMâ appears on the basic display. 40 ENGLISH ESPAÃÂOL DEUTSCH FRANÃÂAIS ITALIANO NEDERLANDS
41 âÂÂMemor y Stickâ Player S canning tracks of a âÂÂMemor y Stickâ Scan play lets you hear the first 10 seconds of each track on the âÂÂMemory StickâÂÂ. 1. Press FUNC and then press SCAN to select the scan mode. 2. Press SCAN to turn scan play on. The light illuminates. The first 10 seconds of each track are played. ⢠When the scan mode is exited while scan play is on, âÂÂSCANâ appears on the basic display. 3. When you find the desired track, press SCAN to turn scan play off. The light goes off. The track will continue to play. ⢠If the scan mode is automatically canceled, select the scan mode again. Note: ⢠After scanning of a âÂÂMemory Stickâ is finished, nor- mal playback of the tracks will begin again. S electing tracks from the track title list The track title list lets you see the list of track titles on a âÂÂMemory Stickâ and select one of them for playback. 1. Press FUNC and then press T.LIST to select the track title list mode. 2. Press NEXT to display the desired track title. Press NEXT until the desired track title appears. 3. Press the corresponding number button to select the desired track title. That selection will begin to play. Note: ⢠You can also use 2, 3 and 5 to select and play the desired track title. P ausing âÂÂMemor y Stickâ play- back Pause lets you temporarily stop playback of the âÂÂMemory StickâÂÂ. 1. Press FUNC and then press PAUSE to select the pause mode. 2. Press PAUSE to turn the pause on. The light illuminates. Play of the current track pauses. ⢠Press PAUSE again to turn the pause off. ⢠When the pause mode is exited while pause is on, âÂÂPAUSEâ is displayed in the basic display. Note: ⢠You can also turn pause on or off by pressing PAUSE in the following display.
E rasing tracks from the âÂÂMemor y Stickâ Tracks may be erased from the âÂÂMemory StickâÂÂ, either one track at a time or all at once. Erasing a track from the âÂÂMemor y Stickâ 1. Press FUNC and NEXT and then press ERStrk to select the one-track erase mode. 2. Press 2 2 or 3 3 to select the desired track. 3. Press 5 5 to erase the currently playing track from the âÂÂMemory StickâÂÂ. The confirmation screen appears. 4. Press 2 2 and then press 5 5 to select âÂÂYESâÂÂ. ⢠To prevent erasure of the track, press 3 and 5 and select âÂÂNOâÂÂ. Note: ⢠If you erase all tracks, the function menu will be cancelled and âÂÂNo audioâ is displayed. ⢠You can not adjust the volume while âÂÂYESâ is selected and during erasing. Erasing all tracks from the âÂÂMemor y Stickâ 1. Press FUNC and NEXT and then press ERSall to select the erase all tracks mode. 2. Press 5 5 to erase all tracks from the âÂÂMemory StickâÂÂ. The confirmation screen appears. 3. Press 2 2 and then press 5 5 to select âÂÂYESâÂÂ. When the tracks have been erased, the function menu is cancelled and âÂÂNo audioâ is displayed. ⢠To prevent erasure of all tracks, press 3 and 5 and select âÂÂNOâÂÂ. Note: ⢠You can not adjust the volume while âÂÂYESâ is selected and during erasing. 42 ENGLISH ESPAÃÂOL DEUTSCH FRANÃÂAIS ITALIANO NEDERLANDS
43 Multi-CD Player D isplay and indicators FORM 1 FORM 2 q Source name w Disc number e Track number r Disc title t Play time y Track title 50 -disc multi-CD player Only those functions described in this manual are supported for 50-disc multi-CD players. B asic operation This product can control a multi-CD player, which is sold separately. 1. Press SOURCE to select the multi-CD player. Press SOURCE until âÂÂMulti-CDâ appears. 2. Press VOLUME to extend the VOLUME outward. ⢠When you press VOLUME, it extends out- ward so that it becomes easier to turn. To retract VOLUME, press it again. 3. Turn VOLUME to adjust the volume. 4. Press 5 5 or â â to select a disc. A disc number for which there is no disc will be skipped. ⢠You can use the buttons 1 â 6 (or 7 â 12) to select a disc directly. 5. Press 2 2 or 3 3 to select a track. Pressing 3 skips to the start of the next track. Pressing 2 once skips to the start of the cur- rent track. Pressing again will skip to the previous track. ⢠If you press and hold 2 or 3, you can per- form fast forward or reverse. Note: ⢠When the multi-CD player is performing the preparatory operations, âÂÂReadyâ is displayed. ⢠If the multi-CD player cannot operate properly, an error message such as âÂÂERROR-12â is displayed. Refer to the multi-CD player ownerâÂÂs manual. ⢠If there are no discs in the multi-CD player maga- zine, âÂÂNo discâ is displayed. S electing a disc directly You can use the buttons 1 â 6 (or 7 â 12) to select a disc directly. 1. Press NEXT to display âÂÂ1â â âÂÂ6â (or âÂÂ7â â âÂÂ12âÂÂ). Press NEXT until âÂÂ1â â âÂÂ6â (or âÂÂ7â â âÂÂ12âÂÂ) appears. 2. Press any of the buttons 1 â 6 (or 7 â 12) to select a disc located at 1 to 6 (or 7 to 12). Note: ⢠You cannot display âÂÂ7â â âÂÂ12â when a 6-disc multi- CD player is connected. ry qw e t rt qw e
S witching and scrolling the title When playing a CD TEXT disc on a CD TEXT compatible multi-CD player, you can switch text display such as artist name and track title. With text longer than 32 letters, you can scroll to see the rest of the text. 1. Press TITLE to switch the title mode. 2. Press the corresponding button to dis- play the desired title. FORM 1 Button Operation D.TTL Displays disc title. D.ART Displays disc artist name. T.TTL Displays track title. T.ART Displays track artist name. THNDR Displays thunderbolt animation. SCROLL Scrolls the displayed title. FORM 2 Button Operation TTL1 Displays disc title and track title. TTL2 Displays disc title and disc artist name. TTL3 Displays track title and track artist name. SCROLL Scrolls the displayed title. Note: ⢠If you do not operate the function within about eight seconds, the display is automatically returned. ⢠You cannot use 5 /â /2 /3 to select a disc or track in title mode. ⢠When you select the display form 2, the titles are displayed up to 24 letters long. ⢠A CD TEXT disc is a CD featuring recorded text information such as disc title, artist name and track title. ⢠If certain text information is not recorded on a CD TEXT disc, âÂÂNo ~â (e.g., âÂÂNo titleâÂÂ) is displayed. ⢠If you have not input disc titles, âÂÂNo titleâ is dis- played. M ulti-CD player function menu The multi-CD player function menu has the fol- lowing functions: Note: ⢠If you do not operate the function within about 30 seconds, the display is automatically returned. (When you select the disc title input mode (TTLin) or ITS memory mode (ITS.M), the display is not returned automatically.) ⢠âÂÂT.LISTâ is displayed only when playing a CD TEXT disc on a CD TEXT compatible multi-CD player. R epeating play There are three repeat play ranges for the multi-CD player: one-track repeat, disc repeat and multi-CD player repeat. 1. Press FUNC to select the repeat mode. 2. Press RPT to select the repeat range. Press RPT repeatedly to switch between the following repeat ranges: Magazine repeat (multi-CD player repeat) = Track repeat (one-track repeat) = Disc repeat (disc repeat) ⢠When the repeat mode is exited, either âÂÂT.RPTâ or âÂÂD.RPTâ may appear on the basic display. â âÂÂT.RPTâ appears while the one-track repeat is selected. â âÂÂD.RPTâ appears while the disc repeat is selected. Note: ⢠If you select other discs during repeat play, the repeat range changes to multi-CD player repeat. ⢠If you perform track search or fast forward/reverse during one-track repeat, the repeat range changes to disc repeat. 44 ENGLISH ESPAÃÂOL DEUTSCH FRANÃÂAIS ITALIANO NEDERLANDS
45 Multi-CD Player P laying tracks in random order Random play lets you play back tracks in ran- dom order within the repeat range: multi-CD player repeat and disc repeat. 1. Select the repeat range. Refer to âÂÂRepeating playâ on page 44. 2. Press FUNC and then press RDM to select the random mode. 3. Press RDM to turn random play on. The light illuminates. Tracks will play in ran- dom order within the selected repeat range. ⢠Press RDM again to turn random play off. ⢠When the random mode is exited while random play is on, âÂÂRDMâ appears on the basic display. Note: ⢠If you turn random play on during one-track repeat, the repeat range changes to disc repeat. S canning CDs and tracks When you select disc repeat, scan play lets you hear the first 10 seconds of each track on the selected CD. When you select multi-CD player repeat, scan play lets you hear the first 10 sec- onds of the first track on each CD. 1. Select the repeat range. Refer to âÂÂRepeating playâ on page 44. 2. Press FUNC and then press SCAN to select the scan mode. 3. Press SCAN to turn scan play on. The light illuminates. The first 10 seconds of each track of the current disc (or the first track of each disc) are played. ⢠When the scan mode is exited while scan play is on, âÂÂSCANâ appears on the basic display. 4. When you find the desired track (or disc), press SCAN to turn scan play off. The light goes off. The track (or disc) will continue to play. ⢠If the scan mode is automatically canceled, select the scan mode again. Note: ⢠After track or disc scanning is finished, normal playback of the tracks will begin again. ⢠If you turn scan play on during one-track repeat, the repeat range changes to disc repeat. S electing tracks from the track title list The track title list lets you see the list of track titles on a CD TEXT disc and select one of them for playback. 1. Press FUNC and then press T.LIST to select the track title list mode. 2. Press NEXT to display the desired track title. Press NEXT until the desired track title appears. 3. Press the corresponding number button to select the desired track title. That selection will begin to play. Note: ⢠You can also use 2, 3 and 5 to select and play the desired track title. ⢠Only when playing a CD TEXT disc on a CD TEXT compatible multi-CD player, you can switch to this mode.
S electing discs from the disc title list The disc title list lets you see the list of disc titles and select one of them for playback. Displayed disc titles are those which have been entered into the multi-CD player or recorded on a CD TEXT disc. 1. Press FUNC and then press D.LIST to select the disc title list mode. 2. Press NEXT to switch between âÂÂ1â â âÂÂ6â and âÂÂ7â â âÂÂ12âÂÂ. 3. Press any of the buttons 1 â 6 (or 7 â 12) to select the desired disc title. That selection will begin to play. Note: ⢠You can also use 2, 3 and 5 to select and play the desired disc title. ⢠âÂÂNo D.Titleâ is displayed for a disc whose title has not been input. ⢠âÂÂNo discâ is displayed next to the disc number when no disc is set in the magazine. ⢠You cannot display âÂÂ7â â âÂÂ12â when a 6-disc multi- CD player is connected. P ausing CD playback Pause lets you temporarily stop playback of the CD. 1. Press FUNC and then press PAUSE to select the pause mode. 2. Press PAUSE to turn pause on. The light illuminates. Play of the current track pauses. ⢠Press PAUSE again to turn pause off. ⢠When the pause mode is exited while pause is on, âÂÂPAUSEâ is displayed in the basic display. Note: ⢠You can also turn pause on or off by pressing PAUSE in the following display. E ntering disc titles Disc title input lets you input up to 100 CD titles up to 10 letters long (with ITS memory) into the multi-CD player. If you input a CD title, the entered title is displayed. 1. Press 5 5 or â â to play a disc you want to enter the title. 2. Press FUNC and NEXT and then press TTLin to select the disc title input mode. 3. Press ABC to switch the character mode. Press ABC repeatedly to switch between the following modes: Alphabet (upper case), numbers and sym- bols = Alphabet (lower case) = European letters, such as those with accents (e.g. á, à, ä, ç) ⢠Press 012 to switch to the numbers and symbols mode. 4. Press 5 5 or â â to select letters, numbers and symbols. ⢠To insert a space, select the flashing cur- sor âÂÂ_âÂÂ. Continued overleaf. 46 ENGLISH ESPAÃÂOL DEUTSCH FRANÃÂAIS ITALIANO NEDERLANDS
47 Multi-CD Player 5. Press 3 3 to move the cursor to the next character position. ⢠Press 2 to move backwards in the display. 6. Press 3 3 to move the cursor to the last position and then press 3 3 one more time after entering the title. 7. Press BAND to cancel the disc title input mode. Note: ⢠When playing a CD TEXT disc on a CD TEXT com- patible multi-CD player, if you switch to this mode, âÂÂNo title inputâ is displayed and you cannot input the title. ⢠Titles remain in memory even after the disc has been removed from the magazine, and are recalled when the disc is reinserted. ⢠After the titles for 100 discs have been entered, the data for a new disc will overwrite the oldest one. U sing compression and dynamic bass emphasis Using the COMP (compression) and DBE (dynamic bass emphasis) functions enables multi-CD player sound quality adjustment. Each of the functions enables two-step adjustment. The COMP function adjusts imbalances between loud and subdued sounds at higher volumes. DBE boosts bass levels to give a fuller sound. 1. Press FUNC and NEXT and then press COMP to select the compression and dynamic bass emphasis mode. 2. Press COMP to select the desired setting. Press COMP repeatedly to switch between the following settings: COMP OFF = COMP 1 = COMP 2 = COMP OFF = DBE 1 = DBE 2 ⢠When this mode is exited except for âÂÂCOMP OFFâ is selected, âÂÂCOMPâ appears on the basic display. Note: ⢠If the multi-CD player does not support these func- tions, âÂÂNo COMPâ is displayed when you attempt to select it. U sing ITS memor y The ITS (instant track selection) lets you make a program of favorite tracks from those in the multi-CD player magazine. After you have added your favorite tracks to the ITS memory, you can turn on ITS play and play just those selections. Programming tracks in ITS memor y You can use ITS to enter and play back up to 99 tracks per disc for up to 100 discs (with the disc title). (With multi-CD players released before the CDX-P1250 and CDX-P650, the maximum number of programmable tracks is 24.) 1. Press 5 5 or â â to play the CD you want to program. 2. Press FUNC and NEXT and then press ITS.M to select the ITS memory mode. 3. Press 2 2 or 3 3 to select the desired track. 4. Press MEMO to store the currently play- ing track in the ITS memory. âÂÂMemory completeâ is displayed briefly and the currently playing track is added to ITS memory. 5. Press BAND to cancel the ITS memory mode. Note: ⢠In this mode, you can also use 5 to store the cur- rently playing track in the ITS memory. ⢠After 100 discs have been programmed, the data for a new disc will overwrite the oldest one.
Playback from ITS memor y ITS play lets you listen to the tracks that you have entered into ITS memory. When you turn on ITS play, tracks from ITS memory in the multi-CD player will begin to play. 1. Select the repeat range. Refer to âÂÂRepeating playâ on page 44. 2. Press FUNC and NEXT and then press ITS.P to select the ITS play mode. 3. Press ITS.P to turn ITS play on. The light illuminates. Playback begins of those tracks from ITS memory within the selected repeat range: multi-CD player repeat or disc repeat. ⢠Press ITS.P again to turn ITS play off. ⢠When the ITS play mode is exited while ITS play is on, âÂÂITSâ appears on the basic display. Note: ⢠If no track in the current play range is programmed for ITS play, âÂÂITS emptyâ is displayed. Erasing a track from ITS memor y When you want to erase a track from ITS mem- ory, you can do so when ITS play is on. 1. Turn ITS play on while playing a CD from which you want to erase a track program from ITS memory. Refer to âÂÂPlayback from ITS memoryâ on this page. 2. Press FUNC and NEXT and then press ITS.M to select the ITS memory mode. 3. Press 2 2 or 3 3 to select the desired track. 4. Press CLEAR to erase the currently play- ing track from ITS memory. The currently playing track is erased from ITS memory and playback of the next track from ITS memory begins. If there are no tracks from ITS memory in the current play range, âÂÂITS emptyâ is displayed and normal play resumes. 5. Press BAND to cancel the ITS memory mode. Note: ⢠In this mode, you can also use â to erase the cur- rently playing track from ITS memory. Erasing a CD from ITS memor y When you want to erase all tracks of a CD from ITS memory, you can do so when ITS play is off. 1. Press 5 5 or â â to select the CD you want to erase from ITS memory. If ITS play is on, turn ITS play off. Refer to âÂÂPlayback from ITS memoryâ on this page. 2. Press FUNC and NEXT and then press ITS.M to select the ITS memory mode. 3. Press CLEAR to erase all tracks on the currently playing CD from ITS memory. âÂÂMemory deletedâ is displayed briefly and all tracks on the currently playing CD are erased from ITS memory. 4. Press BAND to cancel the ITS memory mode. Note: ⢠In this mode, you can also use â to erase all tracks on the currently playing CD from ITS memory. 48 ENGLISH ESPAÃÂOL DEUTSCH FRANÃÂAIS ITALIANO NEDERLANDS
49 DAB T uner D isplay and indicators FORM 1 FORM 2 q Band w TRFC indicator e NEWS indicator r TXT indicator t Preset number y ANNC indicator u WTHR indicator i Service label o EXTRA indicator !0 DAB indicator !1 Service component label Indications that light when function is switched on Indicator Function W (THR)* Area weather flash (weather) A (NNC)* Announce (announce) N (EWS)* News flash (news) T (RFC)* Road traffic flash or transport flash * If the set announcement support is received, the letters in parentheses light. DAB status indications Indicator Status EXTRA The currently received service has a secondary service com- ponent. TXT The currently received service has a dynamic label. DAB When DAB reception is possi- ble. B asic operation 1. Press SOURCE to select the DAB tuner. Press SOURCE until âÂÂDAB Tunerâ appears. 2. Press VOLUME to extend the VOLUME outward. ⢠When you press VOLUME, it extends out- ward so that it becomes easier to turn. To retract VOLUME, press it again. 3. Turn VOLUME to adjust the volume. 4. Press 2 2 or 3 3 to select a service. 5. Press and hold 2 2 or 3 3 for one second and release to select an ensemble. i! 1 e! 0 qu t y w r o yu i o! 0 qw e r t The following explains how to use this product to control a DAB tuner, which is sold separately. For details of DAB tuner-specific operation/fea- tures, see your DAB tunerâÂÂs manual. ⢠This product does not have the language filter function. ⢠With this product, you can operate three addi- tional functions: available service list, available PTY search, storing and recalling dynamic label. ⢠DAB (digital audio broadcasting) refers to digital radio that broadcasts in Canada.
S toring and recalling ser vices Storing ser vices 1. Press NEXT to display âÂÂ1â â âÂÂ6âÂÂ. Press NEXT until âÂÂ1â â âÂÂ6â appears. 2. When you find a service that you want to store in memory, press and hold any of the buttons 1 â 6 until the preset number stops flashing. The service is stored in memory under the selected button. Recalling ser vices 1. Press NEXT to display âÂÂ1â â âÂÂ6âÂÂ. Press NEXT until âÂÂ1â â âÂÂ6â appears. 2. Press any of the buttons 1 â 6 to recall the service preset under that button. Note: ⢠You can also use 5 or â to recall services memo- rized under the buttons 1 â 6. C hanging band ⢠Press BAND to select the desired band. Press BAND repeatedly to switch between the following bands: DAB 1 = DAB 2 = DAB 3 S witching the display ⢠Press DISP to select the desired display. Press DISP repeatedly to switch between the following displays: FORM 1 SERVICE (service label) = COMPONENT (service component label) = D.TEXT (dynamic label segment head line) = ENSEMBLE (ensemble label) = PTY (PTY label) FORM 2 SERVICE (service label) and COMPO- NENT (service component label) = D.TEXT (dynamic label segment head line) = SERVICE (service label) and ENSEM- BLE (ensemble label) = SERVICE (service label) and PTY (PTY label) Note: ⢠With a service component that has no service com- ponent label or dynamic label, the display is blank when you switch to service component label and dynamic label. S witching the road traffic flash and transport flash on or off 1. Press NEXT to display âÂÂTAâÂÂ. Press NEXT until âÂÂTAâ appears. 2. Press TA to turn the road traffic flash and transport flash on. The â 3TRFCâ or âÂÂTâ indicator lights. ⢠Press TA again to turn the road traffic flash and transport flash off. Canceling road traffic flash and transport flash interruptions part way through 1. Press NEXT to display âÂÂTAâÂÂ. Press NEXT until âÂÂTAâ appears. 2. To cancel a road traffic flash or transport flash interruption and return to the origi- nal source, press the TA during an announcement interruption. 50 ENGLISH ESPAÃÂOL DEUTSCH FRANÃÂAIS ITALIANO NEDERLANDS
51 DAB T uner D ynamic label function Displaying dynamic labels 1. Press NEXT to display âÂÂD.TEXTâÂÂ. Press NEXT until âÂÂD.TEXTâ appears. 2. Press D.TEXT to switch to the dynamic label mode. 3. Press 2 2 or 3 3 to recall the three latest dynamic label broadcasts from the tunerâÂÂs memory. Pressing 2 or 3 switches between the four dynamic label data displays. Note: ⢠Press BAND to cancel the dynamic label mode. ⢠When no dynamic label is currently being received, âÂÂNo textâ is displayed. ⢠If there is no dynamic label data stored in the tuner, 2 /3 do not operate. ⢠If you do not operate the function within about 60 seconds, the display is automatically returned. Storing a dynamic label You can store data from up to six dynamic label transmissions under the buttons MEMO1 â MEMO6. 1. Select the dynamic label you want to store in memory. Refer to âÂÂDisplaying dynamic labelsâ on this page. 2. Press and hold any of the buttons MEMO1 â MEMO6 until âÂÂDAB memoâ appears to store the desired dynamic label. The dynamic label is stored in memory under the selected button. Recalling a dynamic label 1. Press NEXT to display âÂÂD.TEXTâÂÂ. Press NEXT until âÂÂD.TEXTâ appears. 2. Press D.TEXT to switch to the dynamic label mode 3. Press any of the buttons MEMO1 â MEMO6 to recall the dynamic label preset under that button. D AB tuner function menu The DAB tuner function menu has the following functions: q AS (announcement support) For operation of the announcement support, refer to âÂÂSetting the announcement support interruptionâ on page 52. w chLIST (preset service list) For operation of the preset service list, refer to âÂÂSelecting services from the preset ser- vice listâ on page 52. e S.LIST (available service list) For operation of the available service list, refer to âÂÂSelecting services from the avail- able service listâ on page 52. r PTY (available PTY search) For operation of the available PTY search, refer to âÂÂSearching the available PTYâ on page 52. t P/2ND (primary/secondary) Press P/2ND repeatedly to switch to the next service component. Note: ⢠If you do not operate the function within about 30 seconds, the display is automatically returned. qwe r t
S etting the announcement sup- port interruption 1. Press FUNC and then press AS to select the announcement support mode. 2. Press the corresponding button to turn the desired announcement support on. Button Announcement NEWS News flash WTHR Area weather flash ANNC Announcement Note: ⢠You can also use 2, 3 and 5 to select and turn on the desired announcement. S electing ser vices from the pre- set ser vice list 1. Press FUNC and then press chLIST to select the preset service list mode. 2. Press any of the buttons 1 â 6 to recall the desired service. Note: ⢠You can also use 2, 3 and 5 to select and recall the desired service. S electing ser vices from the avail- able ser vice list The available service list lets you see the list of available services and select one of them to receive, if the currently received ensemble has multiple services. 1. Press FUNC and then press S.LIST to select the available service list mode. 2. Press 2 2 or 3 3 to select the desired ser- vice. 3. Press 5 5 to receive the selected service. S earching the available PTY Available PTY search lets you see the list of available PTYs that is in the current ensemble and select one of them to receive. ⢠Available PTY search function is different from PTY search function. With this product, you can operate only the available PTY search. 1. Press FUNC and then press PTY to select the available PTY search mode. 2. Press 2 2 or 3 3 to select the desired PTY. 3. Press 5 5 to start the PTY search. DAB receives the desired PTY service. Note: ⢠The PTY method displayed is narrow. ⢠If there is no available PTY in the current ensemble, you cannot switch to the available PTY search mode. ⢠If no service broadcasting the selected program- ming type is found, âÂÂNot foundâ is displayed briefly, and the DAB tuner returns to the previous service. 52 ENGLISH ESPAÃÂOL DEUTSCH FRANÃÂAIS ITALIANO NEDERLANDS
53 TV T uner D isplay and indicators FORM 1 FORM 2 q Band w Preset number e Channel B asic operation 1. Press SOURCE to select the TV tuner. Press SOURCE until âÂÂTelevisionâ appears. 2. Press VOLUME to extend the VOLUME outward. ⢠When you press VOLUME, it extends for- ward so that it becomes easier to turn. To retract VOLUME, press it again. 3. Turn VOLUME to adjust the volume. 4. Press 2 2 or 3 3 to tune in to a station. ⢠If you press and hold 2 or 3 for about one second and then release, you can perform seek tuning. S toring and recalling broadcast stations If you press any of the buttons 1 â 6 (or 7 â 12), you can easily store up to 12 broadcast stations for later recall. Storing broadcast stations 1. Press NEXT to display âÂÂ1â â âÂÂ6â (or âÂÂ7â â âÂÂ12âÂÂ). Press NEXT until âÂÂ1â â âÂÂ6â (or âÂÂ7â â âÂÂ12âÂÂ) appears. 2. When you find a station that you want to store in memory, press and hold any of the buttons 1 â 6 (or 7 â 12) until the pre- set number stops flashing. The station is stored in memory under the selected button. Note: ⢠Up to 12 stations can be memorized in one band. ⢠This product allows you to store and recall directly using preset channels 7 âÂÂ12. e qw e qw The following explains how to use this product to control a TV tuner, which is sold separately. For details of TV tuner-specific operation/fea- tures, see your TV tunerâÂÂs manual. ⢠With this product, you can operate preset chan- nel list as one additional function.
54 ENGLISH ESPAÃÂOL DEUTSCH FRANÃÂAIS ITALIANO NEDERLANDS Recalling broadcast stations 1. Press NEXT to display âÂÂ1â â âÂÂ6â (or âÂÂ7â â âÂÂ12âÂÂ). Press NEXT until âÂÂ1â â âÂÂ6â (or âÂÂ7â â âÂÂ12âÂÂ) appears. 2. Press any of the buttons 1 â 6 (or 7 â 12) to recall the station preset under that but- ton. Note: ⢠You can also use 5 or â to recall broadcast sta- tions memorized under the buttons 1 â 12. C hanging band ⢠Press BAND to select the desired band. Press BAND repeatedly to switch between the following bands: TV 1 = TV 2 T V tuner function menu The TV tuner function menu has the following functions: q BSSM (best stations sequential memory) Press BSSM repeatedly to turn BSSM on or off. When finished, the display switches to the preset channel list mode. w chLIST (preset channel list) For operation of the preset channel list, refer to âÂÂSelecting channels from the preset chan- nel listâ on this page. Note: ⢠If you do not operate the function within about 30 seconds, the display is automatically returned. S electing channels from the pre- set channel list The preset channel list lets you see the list of preset channels and select one of them to receive. 1. Press FUNC and then press chLIST to select the preset channel list mode. 2. Press NEXT to switch between âÂÂ1â â âÂÂ6â and âÂÂ7â â âÂÂ12âÂÂ. 3. Press any of the buttons 1 â 6 (7 â 12) to recall the desired channel. Note: ⢠You can also use 2, 3 and 5 to select and recall the desired channel. qw
55 Audio Adjustments A djusting the audio easily The following functions let you easily adjust your audio system to match the car interior acoustic characteristics which vary depending on the type of car. ⢠Recalling equalizer curves (EEQ) ⢠Using position selector (POSI) ⢠Using time alignment (T.AL1) ⢠Adjusting equalizer curves (EQ1) A djusting the audio finely By carrying out the following settings/adjust- ments in order, you can create a finely-tuned sound field effortlessly. ⢠Using position selector (POSI) ⢠Using time alignment (T.AL1) ⢠Adjusting time alignment (T.AL2) ⢠Using subwoofer output (SW1) ⢠Adjusting subwoofer settings (SW2) ⢠Setting the high pass filter for front speakers (HPF F) ⢠Setting the high pass filter for rear speakers (HPF R) ⢠Using balance adjustment (F/B) ⢠Creating the auto-equalizer curve (A.EQ) ⢠Recalling equalizer curves (EEQ) ⢠Adjusting equalizer curves (EQ1) ⢠Adjusting 13-band graphic equalizer (EQ2) E xtra functions These functions are helpful in adjusting the sound to suit your system or your personal pref- erences. ⢠Using loudness (LOUD) ⢠Using sound field control, octaver and BBE sound (SFC) ⢠Using automatic sound levelizer (ASL) ⢠Adjusting source levels (SLA) ⢠Switching the digital attenuator (D.ATT) R ecalling equalizer cur ves The graphic equalizer lets you adjust equaliza- tion to match the car interior acoustic character- istics as desired. There are seven stored equal- izer curves which you can easily recall at any time. 1. Press EEQ to switch to the easy equalizer mode. 2. Press NEXT to switch between âÂÂCSTM2â and the other selections (curves). 3. Press the corresponding button to select the desired equalizer curve. Button Equalizer curve S.BASS Super bass PWRFL Powerful NATRL Natural VOCAL Vocal FLAT Flat CSTM1 Custom1 CSTM2 Custom2 ⢠âÂÂCUSTOM1â and âÂÂCUSTOM2â are adjusted equalizer curves that you can create for yourself. (Refer to âÂÂAdjusting 13-band graphic equalizerâ on page 57.) ⢠When âÂÂFLATâ is selected the equalizer makes no supplement or correction to the sound. This is useful for checking the effect of the equalizer curves by switching alternatively between âÂÂFLATâ and a set equalizer curve. Note: ⢠You can also use 2 and 3 to select the desired equalizer curve. ⢠If you do not operate the function within about eight seconds, the display is automatically returned.
A udio menu The audio menu has the following functions: Note: ⢠If you do not operate the function within about 30 seconds, the display is automatically returned. (When you select the 13-band graphic equalizer mode (EQ2) or the time alignment adjustment mode (T.AL2), the display is not returned automatically.) ⢠âÂÂT.AL2â is displayed only when you select âÂÂFLâ or âÂÂFRâ in the position selector mode (POSI). ⢠âÂÂSW2â is displayed only when the subwoofer output is on in the subwoofer output mode (SW1). ⢠âÂÂSLAâ is not displayed when you select FM tuner as the source. ⢠âÂÂA.EQâ is displayed after the auto-equalizer curve has been set. U sing balance adjustment You can select a fader/balance setting that pro- vides an ideal listening environment in all occu- pied seats. 1. Press AUDIO to select the fader/balance mode. 2. Press 5 5 or â â to adjust front/rear speaker balance. Each press of 5 or â moves the front/rear speaker balance towards the front or the rear. ⢠âÂÂFADER F25â â âÂÂFADER R25â is displayed as the front/rear speaker balance moves from front to rear. ⢠âÂÂFADER FR00â is the proper setting when only two speakers are used. 3. Press 2 2 or 3 3 to adjust left/right speaker balance. Each press of 2 or 3 moves the left/right speaker balance towards the left or the right. ⢠âÂÂBALANCE L25â â âÂÂBALANCE R25â is dis- played as the left/right speaker balance moves from left to right. U sing loudness Loudness compensates for deficiencies in the low- and high-sound ranges at low volume. 1. Press AUDIO and then press LOUD to select the loudness mode. 2. Press LOUD to turn the loudness on. âÂÂLOUDNESS ONâ appears in the display. ⢠Press LOUD again to turn loudness off. U sing sound field control, octaver and BBE R sound SFC (sound field control) incorporates four pro- grams reproducing the typical sound field of a studio, club, concert hall or dome. This function makes it possible to reproduce the realistic sound fields of the four programs in your car. Octaver makes the bass sound louder. Playback very close to the original sound can be obtained by correction with a combination of phase compensation and high-range boost for the delay of the high-frequency components and the amplitude deviation occurring during playback. This function makes it possible to reproduce the dynamic sound field as if you are listening to a live performance. Note: ⢠Manufactured under license from BBE Sound, Inc. The mark BBE is a trademark of BBE Sound, Inc. 56 ENGLISH ESPAÃÂOL DEUTSCH FRANÃÂAIS ITALIANO NEDERLANDS
57 Audio Adjustments Recalling sound field programs 1. Press AUDIO and then press SFC to select the sound field control mode. 2. Press the corresponding button to select the desired sound field program. Button Effect STUDIO Studio CLUB Club HALL Concert hall DOME Dome OCT Octaver 1 and 2 BBE BBE ⢠Press the same button again to cancel the selected sound field program. Switching the octaver setting You can switch the octaver setting. âÂÂOCTAVER2â has a stronger effect âÂÂOCTAVER1âÂÂ. 1. Press AUDIO and SFC and then press OCT to select octaver. 2. Press 5 5 or â â to switch the octaver set- ting. Each press of 5 or â switches the octaver setting between 1 and 2. Adjusting BBE sound level For BBE sound processing technology, you can adjust the level of BBE. 1. Press AUDIO and SFC and then press BBE to select BBE. 2. Press 5 5 or â â to adjust the level of BBE. Each press of 5 or â increases or decreas- es the level of BBE. ⢠â 4â â âÂÂâÂÂ4â is displayed as the level is increased or decreased. A djusting equalizer cur ves The factory supplied equalizer curves, with the exception of âÂÂFLATâÂÂ, can be adjusted to a fine degree (nuance control). 1. Press AUDIO and then press EQ1 to select the graphic equalizer mode. 2. Press 5 5 or â â to adjust the equalizer curve. Each press of 5 or â increases or decreas- es the equalizer curve respectively. ⢠â 6â â âÂÂâÂÂ6â is displayed as the equalizer curve is increased or decreased. Note: ⢠The actual range of the adjustment differs depend- ing on which equalizer curve is selected. ⢠The equalizer curve with all frequencies set to 0 cannot be adjusted. ⢠You can use 2 and 3 to select the desired equaliz- er curve. A djusting 13-band graphic equal- izer For âÂÂCUSTOM1â and âÂÂCUSTOM2â equalizer curves, you can adjust the level of each band. ⢠A separate âÂÂCUSTOM1â curve can be created for each source. (The built-in CD (MP3) and the multi-CD players are set to the same equalizer adjustment setting automatically.) If you make adjustments when a curve other than âÂÂCUSTOM2â is selected, the equalizer curve settings will be memorized in âÂÂCUS- TOM1âÂÂ. ⢠A âÂÂCUSTOM2â curve can be created common to all sources. If you make adjustments when the âÂÂCUSTOM2â curve is selected, the âÂÂCUS- TOM2â curve will be updated.
1. Recall the equalizer curve you want to adjust. Refer to âÂÂRecalling equalizer curvesâ on page 55. 2. Press AUDIO and then press EQ2 to select the 13-band graphic equalizer mode. 3. Press 2 2 or 3 3 to select the equalizer band to be adjusted. Each press of 2 or 3 selects equalizer bands in the following order: 50 à80 à125 à200 à315 à500 à800 à1.25k à2k à3.15k à5k à8k à12.5k (Hz) 4. Press 5 5 or â â to adjust the level of the equalizer band. Each press of 5 or â increases or decreas- es the level of the equalizer band. ⢠â 6â â âÂÂâÂÂ6â is displayed as the level is increased or decreased. ⢠You can then select another band and adjust the level. U sing automatic sound levelizer During driving, noise in the car changes accord- ing to the driving speed and road conditions. The automatic sound levelizer (ASL) monitors such varying noise and automatically increases the volume level, if the noise becomes greater. The sensitivity (variation of volume level to noise level) of ASL can be set to one of five lev- els. 1. Press AUDIO and then press ASL to select the automatic sound levelizer mode. 2. Press ASL to set the automatic sound levelizer sensitivity. Press ASL repeatedly to switch between the following settings: OFF (off) = Low (low) = Mid-Low (mid-low) = Mid (mid) = Mid-High (mid-high) = High (high) ⢠When the ASL mode is exited except for âÂÂOFFâ is selected, âÂÂASLâ appears on the basic display. U sing position selector One way to assure a more natural sound is to clearly position the stereo image, putting you right in the center of the sound field. The position selector function lets you automati- cally adjust the speakersâ output levels and inserts a delay time to match the number and position of occupied seats. The result is a natural sound regardless of where you are seated. 1. Press AUDIO and NEXT and then press POSI to select the position selector mode. 2. Press the corresponding button to select a listening position. Button Position FL Front seat left FR Front seat right FRONT Front seats ALL All seats ⢠Press the same button again to cancel the selected listening position. Note: ⢠You can also use 5, âÂÂ, 2 or 3 to select the listen- ing position. Button Position 2 Front seat left 3 Front seat right 5 Front seats â All seats 58 ENGLISH ESPAÃÂOL DEUTSCH FRANÃÂAIS ITALIANO NEDERLANDS
59 Audio Adjustments U sing time alignment The time alignment lets you adjust the distance between each speaker and the listening posi- tion to match the type of car. There are five types of car stored which you can easily recall at any time. 1. Press AUDIO and NEXT and then press T.AL1 to select the time alignment mode. 2. Press the corresponding button to select the type of car. Button Type of car SEDAN Sedan WAGON Wagon M.VAN Mini van SUV SUV CUSTM Custom ⢠âÂÂCustomâ is an adjusted time alignment that you can create for yourself. Adjusting time alignment For âÂÂCustomâ time alignment, you can adjust the distance between each speaker and the selected position. 1. Press AUDIO and NEXT and then press T.AL2 to select the time alignment adjust- ment mode. 2. Press the corresponding button to select a unit of distance. Button Unit of distance cm Centimeter inch Inch 3. Press 2 2 or 3 3 to select the speaker to be adjusted. Each press of 2 or 3 selects speakers in the following order: Front Left (front left) àFront Right (front right) àRear Right (rear right) àRear Left (rear left) àSub. W (subwoofer) ⢠You cannot select âÂÂSUB.Wâ when the sub- woofer output is off. 4. Press 5 5 or â â to adjust the distance between the selected speaker and the lis- tening position. Each press of 5 or â increases or decreas- es the distance. ⢠âÂÂ400.0cmâ â âÂÂ0.0cmâ is displayed as the distance is increased or decreased, if you have selected centimeters (cm). ⢠âÂÂ160inchâ â âÂÂ0inchâ is displayed as the dis- tance is increased or decreased, if you have selected inches. ⢠You can adjust the distance for the other speakers in the same way. Note: ⢠âÂÂT.AL2â is not displayed when neither âÂÂFLâ or âÂÂFRâ is selected in the position selector mode (POSI). If âÂÂFLâ or âÂÂFRâ is not selected, âÂÂT.AL2â is inactive. U sing subwoofer output This product is equipped with a subwoofer out- put which can be switched on or off. When a subwoofer is connected to this product, turn the subwoofer output on. The subwoofer output phase can be switched between normal and reverse. 1. Press AUDIO and NEXT and then press SW1 to select the subwoofer output mode. 2. Press SW1 to turn the subwoofer output on. âÂÂSUB. W ONâ appears in the display. ⢠Press SW1 again to turn subwoofer output off. 3. Press 2 2 or 3 3 to select the subwoofer output phase. Press 2 to select reverse phase. Press 3 to select normal phase.
Adjusting subwoofer settings When the subwoofer output is on, you can adjust the cut-off frequency and the output level of the subwoofer. 1. Press AUDIO and NEXT and then press SW2 to select the subwoofer setting mode. 2. Press 2 2 or 3 3 to select the cut-off fre- quency. Each press of 2 or 3 selects cut-off fre- quencies in the following order: 50 à63 à80 à100 à125 (Hz) 3. Press 5 5 or â â to adjust the output level of the subwoofer. Each press of 5 or â increases or decreas- es the level of the subwoofer. ⢠â 6â â âÂÂâÂÂ24â is displayed as the level is increased or decreased. Note: ⢠âÂÂSW2â is not displayed when the subwoofer output is off in the subwoofer output mode (SW1). In this case, this mode is inactive. U sing the high pass filter When the subwoofer is connected and you do not want low sound to play from the front or rear speakers, turn the high pass filter on. Only fre- quencies higher than those in the selected range will be output from the front or rear speakers. Setting the high pass filter for front speakers 1. Press AUDIO and NEXT and then press HPF F to select the high pass filter mode. 2. Press HPF F to turn the high pass filter on. âÂÂHPF ONâ appears in the display. ⢠Press HPF F again to turn the high pass fil- ter off. 3. Press 2 2 or 3 3 to select a high pass filter range. Each press of 2 or 3 selects frequencies in the following order: 50 à63 à80 à100 à125 (Hz) Setting the high pass filter for rear speakers 1. Press AUDIO and then press NEXT twice. 2. Press HPF R to select the high pass filter mode. 3. Press HPF R to turn the high pass filter on. âÂÂHPF ONâ appears in the display. ⢠Press HPF R again to turn the high pass filter off. 4. Press 2 2 or 3 3 to select a high pass filter range. Each press of 2 or 3 selects frequencies in the following order: 50 à63 à80 à100 à125 (Hz) 60 ENGLISH ESPAÃÂOL DEUTSCH FRANÃÂAIS ITALIANO NEDERLANDS
Audio Adjustments A djusting source levels SLA (source level adjustment) lets you adjust the volume level of each source to prevent radi- cal changes in volume when switching between sources. ⢠Settings are based on the FM tuner volume level, which remains unchanged. 1. Compare the FM tuner volume level with the level of the source you want to adjust (e.g., built-in CD player). 2. Press AUDIO and then press NEXT twice. 3. Press SLA to select the SLA mode. 4. Press 5 5 or â â to adjust the source vol- ume. Each press of 5 or â increases or decreas- es the source volume. ⢠â 4â â âÂÂâÂÂ4â is displayed as the source vol- ume is increased or decreased. Note: ⢠Since the FM tuner volume is the control, it is not possible to apply source level adjustments to the FM tuner. ⢠The AM tuner volume level can also be adjusted using source level adjustment. ⢠The built-in CD (MP3) and the multi-CD players are both set to the same source level adjustment vol- ume automatically. U sing the auto-equalizer The auto-equalizer is the equalizer curve creat- ed by auto-equalizing. (Refer to âÂÂCreating the auto-equalizer curveâ on this page.) You can turn the auto-equalizer on or off. 1. Press AUDIO and then press NEXT twice. 2. Press A.EQ to select the auto-equalizer on/off mode. 3. Press A.EQ to turn the auto-equalizer on. âÂÂAUTO EQ ONâ appears in the display. ⢠Press A.EQ again to turn auto-equalizer off. Note: ⢠âÂÂA.EQâ is not displayed if auto-equalizing has not been carried out. In this case, this mode is inactive. S witching the digital attenuator When listening to a CD or other source on which the recording level is high, setting the equalizer curve level to high may result in dis- tortion. You can switch the digital attenuator to low to reduce distortion. ⢠Sound quality is better at the high setting, so this is the setting usually used. 1. Press AUDIO and then press NEXT twice. 2. Press D.ATT to select the digital attenua- tor mode. 3. Press the corresponding button to select the digital attenuator level. Button Level LOW Low HIGH High C reating the auto-equalizer cur ve The auto-equalizer automatically measures car interior acoustic characteristics, and then cre- ates the auto-equalizer curve based on that information. W ARNING: ⢠To prevent accidents, never carry out auto- equalizing while driving. When this function measures the car interior acoustic characteris- tics to create an auto-equalizer curve, a loud measurement tone (noise) may be output from the speakers. 61
PRECAUTION: ⢠Carrying out auto-equalizing under the follow- ing conditions may damage the speakers. Be sure to check conditions thoroughly before carrying out auto-equalizing. â When speakers are incorrectly connected. (e.g., When a rear speaker is connected to a subwoofer output.) â When a speaker is connected to a power amp delivering output higher than the speak- erâÂÂs maximum input power capability. ⢠If the microphone is placed in an unsuitable position the measurement tone may become loud and measurement may take a long time, resulting in a drain on battery power. Be sure to place the microphone in the specified loca- tion. (Refer to âÂÂCarrying out auto-equalizing.) Before operating the auto-equalization function ⢠Carry out auto-equalizing in as quiet a place as possible, with the car engine and air condi- tioning switched off. Also cut power to car phones or portable telephones in the car, or remove from the car before carrying out auto- equalizing. Sounds other than the measure- ment tone (surrounding sounds, engine sound, telephones ringing etc.) may prevent correct measurement of car interior acoustic characteristics. ⢠Be sure to carry out auto-equalizing using the supplied microphone. Using another micro- phone may prevent measurement, or result in incorrect measurement of car interior acoustic characteristics. ⢠Neither front nor rear speaker is connected, auto-equalizing cannot be carried out. ⢠When this product is connected to a power amp with input level control, auto-equalizing may not be possible if you lower power amp input level. Set the power ampâÂÂs input level to the standard position. ⢠Auto-equalizing changes the audio settings as below: â The fader/balance settings return to the cen- ter position. (Refer to page 56.) â The graphic equalizer curve switches to âÂÂFLATâÂÂ. (Refer to page 55.) â When a subwoofer is connected to this prod- uct, it will be adjusted automatically either subwoofer output and high pass filter setting for rear speaker. ⢠If you carry out auto-equalizing when an auto- equalizer curve already exists, the previous curve will be erased. Carr ying out auto-equalizing 1. Stop the car in a place that is as quiet as possible, close all doors, windows and the sun roof, and then turn the engine off. If the engine is left running, engine noise may prevent correct auto-equalizing. 2. Fix the supplied microphone in the center of the headrest of the driverâÂÂs seat, facing forward, using the belt (sold separately). The auto-equalizer curve may differ depend- ing on where you place the microphone. If desired, place the microphone on the front passenger seat to carry out auto-equalizing. Continued overleaf. 62 ENGLISH ESPAÃÂOL DEUTSCH FRANÃÂAIS ITALIANO NEDERLANDS
Audio Adjustments 3. Turn the ignition switch to ON or ACC. If the carâÂÂs air conditioner or heater is turned on, turn it off. Noise from the fan in the air conditioner or heater may prevent correct auto-equalizing. ⢠Press SOURCE to turn the source on if this product is turned off. 4. Select the position for the seat on which the microphone is placed. Refer to âÂÂUsing position selectorâ on page 58. ⢠If no position is selected before you start auto-equalizing, âÂÂFLâ is selected automati- cally. 5. Press and hold SOURCE to turn the source off. 6. Press and hold 2 to enter the auto- equalizer measurement mode. ⢠When the source is off, you can check the location of â 2â by turning on the feature demo. 7. Plug the microphone into the microphone input jack on this product. Remove the microphone input jack cap and plug in the microphone. 8. Press A.EQ to start the auto-equalizing. 9. Get out of the car and close the door within 10 seconds when the 10-second count-down starts. The measurement tone (noise) is output from the speakers, and auto-equalizing (acoustic characteristics measurement and compensation) begins. ⢠When all speakers are connected, auto- equalizing is completed in about four min- utes. ⢠To cancel auto-equalizing part way through, press any button. 10. When auto-equalizing is completed, âÂÂCompleteâ is displayed. When correct measurement of car interior acoustic characteristics is not possible, an error message is displayed. (Refer to âÂÂUnderstanding auto-equalizing error mes- sagesâ on page 73.) 11. Press any button to cancel the auto- equalizer mode. 12. Store the microphone and microphone input jack carefully in the safe place. Store the microphone carefully in the glove compartment or other safe place. If the microphone is subjected to direct sunlight for an extended period, high temperatures may cause distortion, color change or malfunc- tion. W ARNING: ⢠After attaching the microphone input jack cap, store it in a safe place. If the microphone input jack cable tangles with the accelerator pedal, it can hamper driving and be extremely dan- gerous. 63
Initial Settings 64 ENGLISH ESPAÃÂOL DEUTSCH FRANÃÂAIS ITALIANO NEDERLANDS I nitial settings menu The initial settings menu has the following func- tions: Initial settings menu operation You can operate the initial settings menu only when the source is off. 1. Press and hold SOURCE to turn the source off. 2. Press and hold 1 to enter the initial settings menu. ⢠When the source is off, you can check the location of â 1â by turning on the feature demo. Note: ⢠Press BAND to cancel the initial settings menu. U sing reverse mode If you do not carry out an operation within about 30 seconds, screen indications will start to reverse, and then continue reversing every 10 seconds. You can turn the reverse mode on or off. 1. With the source turned off, press and hold 1 to select the reverse mode. 2. Press REV to turn the reverse mode on. âÂÂONâ appears in the display. ⢠Press REV again to turn the reverse mode off. U sing the feature demo The feature demo automatically starts when power to this product is switched off while the ignition switch is set to ACC or ON. You can turn the feature demo on or off. 1. With the source turned off, press and hold 1. 2. Press F.DEMO to select the feature demo mode. 3. Press F.DEMO to turn the feature demo on. âÂÂONâ appears in the display. ⢠Press F.DEMO again to turn the feature demo off. Note: ⢠The red lead (ACC) of this product should be con- nected to a terminal coupled with ignition switch ON/OFF operations. If this is not done, the vehicle battery may be drained. S witching the auxiliar y setting It is possible to use auxiliary equipment with this product. Turn the auxiliary setting on when using auxil- iary equipment connected to this product. 1. With the source turned off, press and hold 1. 2. Press AUX to select the AUX mode. 3. Press AUX to turn AUX on. âÂÂONâ appears in the display. ⢠Press AUX again to turn AUX off.
65 Initial Settings S witching the telephone muting/attenuation setting When a call is made or received using a cellular phone connected to this product, the product can be set to either mute or attenuate the audio output. 1. With the source turned off, press and hold 1. 2. Press MUTE.S to select the telephone muting/attenuation mode. 3. Press MUTE.S to select the desired set- ting. Press MUTE.S repeatedly to switch between the following settings: TEL mute = 10dB ATT = 20dB ATT Sound from this product is muted or attenu- ated automatically when a call is made or received using a connected cellular tele- phone. ⢠âÂÂ20dB ATTâ has a stronger effect than âÂÂ10dB ATTâÂÂ, and âÂÂTEL muteâ has a stronger effect than âÂÂ20dB ATTâÂÂ. F ormatting the âÂÂMemor y Stickâ When this product can not read an inserted âÂÂMemory StickâÂÂ, the âÂÂMemory Stickâ must be formatted by this product. Formatting a âÂÂMemory Stickâ erases all data stored on it. Note: ⢠When formatting, all data will be erased. Always confirm the contents of the âÂÂMemory Stickâ before erasing. ⢠When purchasing a commercially available âÂÂMemory StickâÂÂ, it is already FAT-formatted, so fur- ther formatting is unnecessary. 1. With the source turned off, press and hold 1. 2. Press UTLTY to select the format mode. 3. Press OPEN to open the front panel. 4. Insert a âÂÂMemory Stickâ into the MS load- ing slot until it clicks into position. 5. Close the front panel. 6. Press 5 to format a âÂÂMemory StickâÂÂ. The confirmation screen appears. 7. Press 2 and then press 5 to select âÂÂYâÂÂ. When formatting is completed, âÂÂFinishedâ is displayed. ⢠If you press 3 3 and 5 to select âÂÂNâÂÂ, format- ting will be terminated. MS EJECT button MS loading slot
S etting the warning tone The warning tone sounds to remind you to detach the front panel. (Refer to page 13.) You can turn the warning tone function on or off. 1. With the source turned off, press and hold 1. 2. Press NEXT and then press DT-WRN to select the warning tone mode. 3. Press DT-WRN to turn the warning tone on. âÂÂONâ appears in the display. ⢠Press DT-WRN again to turn the warning tone off. 66 ENGLISH ESPAÃÂOL DEUTSCH FRANÃÂAIS ITALIANO NEDERLANDS
67 Other Functions A ttenuating volume The attenuator lets you lower the volume level quickly (by about 90%). ⢠Press ATT to turn the attenuator on. âÂÂATTâ appears in the display. ⢠Press ATT again to turn the attenuator off and return to the original volume level. C hanging the display form This product is equipped with two basic dis- plays. You can select the desired display. 1. Press NEXT to display âÂÂC.MENUâÂÂ. Press NEXT until âÂÂC.MENUâ appears. 2. Press C.MENU and then press D.FORM to select the display form mode. 3. Press either FORM1 or FORM2 to select the desired display form. A djusting the brightness Display brightness adjustment lets you adjust the display for easier viewing when lighting con- ditions change. 1. Press NEXT to display âÂÂC.MENUâÂÂ. Press NEXT until âÂÂC.MENUâ appears. 2. Press C.MENU and then press BRGHT to select the brightness mode. 3. Press 2 2 or 3 3 to adjust the brightness. Each press of 2 or 3 increases or decreas- es the brightness. ⢠âÂÂ00â â âÂÂ31â is displayed as the brightness is increased or decreased. S witching the dimmer setting To prevent the display from being too bright at night, the display is automatically dimmed when the carâÂÂs headlights are turned on. You can switch the dimmer on or off. 1. Press NEXT to display âÂÂC.MENUâÂÂ. Press NEXT until âÂÂC.MENUâ appears. 2. Press C.MENU and then press DMMER to select the dimmer mode. 3. Press DMMER to turn the dimmer on. âÂÂONâ appears on the display. ⢠Press DMMER again to turn the dimmer off. S electing the wall paper pattern The wall paper pattern is only for display form 2 âÂÂFORM2âÂÂ, and there are three patterns to choose from. ⢠When you select âÂÂFORM1âÂÂ, âÂÂPTRNâ is not dis- played and this mode is inactive. 1. Press NEXT to display âÂÂC.MENUâÂÂ. Press NEXT until âÂÂC.MENUâ appears. 2. Press C.MENU and then press PTRN to select the wall paper pattern mode. 3. Press any of the buttons A â C to select the desired pattern. S etting the entertainment display You can change the display to the movie screens, the spectrum analyzer displays, etc., while listening to any source. Setting the movie screen There are four stored movie screens to select from.
1. Press ENT and then press MOVIE to select the movie mode. 2. Press any of the buttons MOVIE1 â MOVIE4 or ALL to select the desired movie. ⢠When you press ALL, you can display movies 1 to 4 sequentially. Note: ⢠The movie screen will disappear temporarily when you perform other operations, but will be displayed again after three seconds. Setting the spectrum analyzer display There are four stored spectrum analyzer dis- plays to select from. 1. Press ENT and then press S/A to select the spectrum analyzer mode. 2. Press any of the buttons S/A1 â S/A4 to select the desired spectrum analyzer. Note: ⢠The spectrum analyzer display will disappear tem- porarily when you perform other operations, but will be displayed again after three seconds. Setting the ASL display You can display the ASL effect level. (Refer to page 58.) ⢠Press ENT and then press ASL to select the ASL display. Note: ⢠The ASL display will disappear temporarily when you perform other operations, but will be displayed again after three seconds. Setting the background visual The background visuals are only for display form 1 âÂÂFORM1âÂÂ. There are five stored back- ground visuals to select from. ⢠When you select âÂÂFORM2âÂÂ, âÂÂBGâ is not dis- played and this mode is inactive. 1. Press ENT and BG and then press BGV to select the background visual mode. 2. Press any of the buttons BGV1 â BGV5 to select the desired visual. Setting the background still picture The background still pictures are only for the display form 1 âÂÂFORM1âÂÂ. There are 12 stored background still pictures to select from. ⢠When you select âÂÂFORM2âÂÂ, âÂÂBGâ is not dis- played and this mode is inactive. 1. Press ENT and BG and then press BGP to select the background still picture mode. 2. Press NEXT to switch between âÂÂBGP1â â âÂÂBGP6â and âÂÂBGP7â â âÂÂBGP12âÂÂ. 3. Press any of the buttons BGP1 â BGP6 (or BGP7 â BGP12) to select the desired picture. Canceling the entertainment display You can cancel the entertainment display (the movie screens, the spectrum analyzer displays, etc.). ⢠Press ENT and then press OFF to cancel the entertainment display. 68 ENGLISH ESPAÃÂOL DEUTSCH FRANÃÂAIS ITALIANO NEDERLANDS
69 Other Functions U sing the AUX source An IP-BUS-RCA interconnector such as the CD-RB20 or CD-RB10 (sold separately) lets you connect this product to auxiliary equipment featuring RCA output. For more details, refer to the IP-BUS-RCA interconnectorâÂÂs ownerâÂÂs man- ual. Selecting AUX as the source ⢠Press SOURCE to select AUX as the source. Press SOURCE until âÂÂAUXâ appears. Entering the AUX title The title displayed for the AUX source can be changed. 1. Press SOURCE to select AUX as the source. Press SOURCE until âÂÂAUXâ appears. 2. Press FUNC and then press TTLin to select the AUX title input mode. Refer to âÂÂEntering disc titlesâ on page 46, and perform procedures 3 to 7 in the same way. Note: ⢠Even if you do not press TTLin you can enter the title, but you will not be able to change the charac- ter types. U sing the telephone muting/ attenuation Sound from this product is muted or attenuated automatically when a call is made or received using a connected cellular telephone. Note: ⢠The sound turns off, âÂÂMUTEâ or âÂÂATTâ is displayed and no audio adjustments, except volume control, are possible. ⢠Operation returns to normal when the phone call is ended.
Additional Information CD player and care ⢠Use only CDs that carry either of the two Compact Disc Digital Audio marks shown below. ⢠Use only normal, round CDs. If you insert irregular, non-round, shaped CDs they may jam in the CD player or not play properly. ⢠Check all CDs for cracks, scratches or warp- ing before playing. CDs that are cracked, scratched or warped may not play properly. Do not use such discs. ⢠Avoid touching the recorded (non-printed side) surface when handling the disc. ⢠Store discs in their cases when not in use. ⢠Keep discs out of direct sunlight and do not expose the discs to high temperatures. ⢠Do not attach labels, write on or apply chemi- cals to the surface of the discs. ⢠To clean dirt from a CD, wipe the disc with a soft cloth outward from the center of the disc. ⢠If the heater is used in cold weather, moisture may form on components inside the CD play- er. Condensation may cause the CD player not to operate properly. If you think that con- densation is a problem, turn off the CD player for an hour or so to allow the CD player to dry out and wipe any damp discs with a soft cloth to remove the moisture. ⢠Road shocks may interrupt CD playback. ⢠SACD (Super Audio CD) refers to the ability to play back only the CD layer on a hybrid disk. CD-R and CD-RW discs ⢠CD-R/CD-RW discs that have not been sub- ject to the âÂÂfinalize processâ (a process that allows them to be played back on a conven- tional CD player) can not be played back. ⢠It may not be possible to play back CD-R/CD- RW discs recorded on a music CD recorder or a personal computer because of disc charac- teristics, scratches or dirt on the disc, or dirt, condensation, etc. on the lens of this unit. ⢠Playback of discs recorded on a personal computer may not be possible depending on the application settings and the environment. Please record with the correct format. (For details, contact the manufacturer of the appli- cation.) ⢠Playback of CD-R/CD-RW discs may become impossible in case of direct exposure to sun- light, high temperatures, or the storage condi- tions in the car. ⢠Titles and other text information recorded on a CD-R/CD-RW disc may not be displayed by this product (in the case of audio data (CD- DA)). ⢠This product conforms to the track skip func- tion of the CD-R/CD-RW disc. The tracks con- taining the track skip information are skipped over automatically (in the case of audio data (CD-DA)). ⢠If you insert a CD-RW disc into this product, load time to playback will be longer than for a conventional CD or CD-R disc. ⢠Read the precautions accompanying the CD- R/CD-RW discs before use. ⢠Recordings on CD-R/CD-RW can not be played back using the DDCD (Double Density CD) system. 70 ENGLISH ESPAÃÂOL DEUTSCH FRANÃÂAIS ITALIANO NEDERLANDS
71 Additional Information MP3 files ⢠MP3 is short for MPEG Audio Layer 3 and refers to an audio compression technology standard. ⢠This product allows playback of MP3 files on CD-ROM, CD-R and CD-RW discs. Disc recordings compatible with ISO9660 level 1 and level 2 can be played back. Correspondence to extended format is made with the following conditions. Joliet: Correspondence only to the 8.3 format. Romeo: Correspondence to folder names with up to 64 characters and file names with up to 63 characters (including the extension). ⢠Discs that have been recorded in multiple recording sessions are replayed in their first session form only. ⢠Files are compatible with the ID3 Tag Ver. 1.0 and Ver. 1.1 formats for display of album (disc title), track (track title) and artist (track artist). ⢠Only when MP3 files of 32, 44.1 and 48 kHz frequencies are played back, the emphasis function is valid. (22.05, 24, 32, 44.1, 48 kHz sampling frequencies can be played back.) ⢠MP3 files are not compatible with packet write data transfer. ⢠There is no m3u playlist compatibility. ⢠There is no compatibility with the MP3i (MP3 interactive) or mp3PRO format. Precaution: ⢠When naming an MP3 file, add the corresponding filename extension (.mp3). ⢠This product plays back files with the filename extension (.mp3) as an MP3 file. To prevent noise and malfunctions, do not use this extension for files other than MP3 files. About folders and MP3 files ⢠An outline of a CD-ROM with MP3 files on it is shown below. Subfolders are shown as fold- ers in the folder currently selected. (In the case shown, 01S is a subfolder of the 01 fold- er.) Note: ⢠The elapsed playback time for the data track of a Mixed Mode CD will be displayed, but no sound will be output. Only music tracks will be played back. ⢠It is not possible to check folders that do not include MP3 files. ⢠MP3 files in up to 8 tiers of folders can be played back. However, there is a delay in the start of play- back on discs with numerous tiers. For this reason we recommend creating discs with no more than 2 tiers. First Second Third level level level
âÂÂM emor y Stickâ player and care ⢠Use only âÂÂMemory Stickâ (âÂÂMagicGate Memory StickâÂÂ) with the mark shown below. ⢠âÂÂMemory Stickâ with the following mark can not be used. ⢠The maximum storage capacity of the âÂÂMG Memory Stickâ compatible with this product is 128 MB. ⢠When the erasure prevention switch is set to LOCK, you can not record, edit or erase. ⢠Do not touch the terminals with your fingers or metal objects. ⢠Do not remove the âÂÂMemory Stickâ while writ- ing (when the access lamp is lights), as this could damage data. ⢠Do not place the âÂÂMemory Stickâ in a place where it may be subject to static or electrical noise, as this can damage data. ⢠The âÂÂMemory Stickâ should be formatted by using this product or the formatting device for the âÂÂMG Memory StickâÂÂ. If the âÂÂMemory Stickâ is formatted with Windows Explorer, data can not be played back on this product. ⢠Store the âÂÂMemory Stickâ away from direct sunlight and high temperatures. ⢠Keep the âÂÂMemory Stickâ away from the source of magnetic interference, such as TVs or audio speakers. ⢠Keep the âÂÂMemory Stickâ in its case. ⢠Paste each âÂÂMemory Stickâ label to a proper location. You may be unable to eject a âÂÂMemory Stickâ if its label is pasted in layer or to a wrong location. ⢠Do not use the âÂÂMemory Stickâ whose label is partially unstuck or floated. Replace such label before using the âÂÂMemory StickâÂÂ, other- wise the label may be caught midway to pre- vent the âÂÂMemory Stickâ from being ejected. ⢠If the surface of the âÂÂMemory Stickâ is tainted, wipe it with clean soft cloth. ⢠Do not apply volatile chemicals such as ben- zine or thinner to the âÂÂMemory StickâÂÂ. 72 ENGLISH ESPAÃÂOL DEUTSCH FRANÃÂAIS ITALIANO NEDERLANDS
73 Additional Information U nderstanding auto-equalizing error messages When correct measurement of car interior acoustic characteristics is not possible using the auto- equalizer, an error message may appear on the display. If an error message appears on the display, refer to the table below to see what the problem is and the suggested method of correcting the prob- lem. After checking, try again. Display Cause Remedy ERROR CHECK MIC Microphone is not connected. Plug the supplied microphone securely into the jack. ERROR CHECK SPEAKER The microphone cannot pick Confirm that the speakers are up the measuring tone of the connected correctly. front and rear speakers. Correct the input level setting of the power amp connected to the speakers. Set the microphone correctly. ERROR CHECK SYSTEM The surrounding noise level Stop your car in a place that is as is too high. quite as possible, and switch off the engine, air conditioner or heater. Set the microphone correctly.
U nderstanding built-in CD player error messages When problems occur during CD play, an error message may appear on the display. If an error mes- sage appears on the display, refer to the table below to see what the problem is and the suggested method of correcting the problem. If the error cannot be corrected, contact your dealer or your near- est Pioneer service center. Display Cause Remedy ERROR- 00, 44 All tracks are skip tracks. Replace disc. ERROR- 11, 12, 17, 30 Dirty disc. Clean disc. ERROR- 11, 12, 17, 30 Scratched disc. Replace disc. ERROR- 12, 17 Unrecorded disc. Check the disc. ERROR- 10, 11, 12, 17, Electrical or mechanical Turn the car ignition ON and OFF, 30, A0, B0 problem. or switch to a different source, then switch back to the CD player. ERROR- 23 The CD format cannot be Replace disc. played back. CanâÂÂt play MP3 file cannot be played Switch to other MP3 file. back. HEAT CD player overheated. Turn off the CD player and wait until the CD player cools down. No audio Nothing has been recorded Replace disc. or the CD format cannot be played back. 74 ENGLISH ESPAÃÂOL DEUTSCH FRANÃÂAIS ITALIANO NEDERLANDS
75 Additional Information U nderstanding music ser ver error messages Display Cause Remedy ERROR- 23 SERVER ERROR- 23 ERROR- 24 SERVER ERROR- 24 ERROR- 30, A0, A1, B0 SERVER ERROR- 30, A0, A1, B0 Can âÂÂt play Expired No audio No PlayList SERVER READ ERROR SERVER WRITE ERROR TEMP Music serverâÂÂs hard disc mal- function. Music server malfunction (due to damaged data, etc.) Electrical or mechanical prob- lem. The music data cannot be played back. The music data has exceeded the playback limit (playback time or number of plays). No recording on music server. No playlist file for music data that can be played back in selected playlist mode. Somehow track information was not read in correctly. There is something wrong with the music server. Somehow track information or FAT was not written correctly. Abnormal temperature inside this product. Repeat operation. Turn the car iginition ON and OFF, or switch to a different source, then switch back to the music server. Turn the car iginition ON and OFF, or switch to a different source, then switch back to the music server. Switch to other music data. Switch to other music data. Record tracks on music server. Switch to other playlist mode. Turn the car iginition ON and OFF, or switch to a different source, then switch back to the music server. Repeat operation. Wait until normal operating temper- ature is restored.
U nderstanding music ser ver error messages when recording Display Cause Remedy ERROR- 56 ERROR- 59 ERROR- 5A ERROR- 5B ERROR- 5- CanâÂÂt copy CD-ROM Defect M.Server full No disc NO SIGNAL PlayList full Retry SERVER READ ERR SERVER WRITE ERR TEMP Continued overleaf. 76 ENGLISH ESPAÃÂOL DEUTSCH FRANÃÂAIS ITALIANO NEDERLANDS Select another track. Erase unwanted playlist files for digital recordings. Erase unwanted playlist files for analog recordings. Erase unwanted artist playlist files. Erase unwanted playlist files for each recording date. Replace a disc that can be copied (a regular CD). Replace a music CD. Clean disc. Erase unwanted tracks. Insert disc. Turn the car ignition OFF and then ON, or press RESET button. Erase unwanted playlist files. Clean disc. Repeat operation. Repeat operation. Wait until the temperature of this unit rises. Wait until normal operating temper- ature is restored. SDMI contravention. You have tried to record more playlist files for digital record- ings than the music server can manage. You have tried to record more playlist files for analog record- ings than the music server can manage. You have tried to record more artist playlist files than the music server can manage. You have tried to record more playlist files for each recording date than the music server can manage. Trying to copy from a copy pro- tect disc including CD-R Trying to copy from a CD- ROM. CD skips three times at same place. Insufficient space to record on music server. No disc is set in this product. You can not enter digital sig- nals into the music server. You have tried to record more playlist files than the music server can manage. The CD skips. Somehow track information was not read in correctly. Somehow track information or FAT was not written correctly. Recording is not possible because of low temperature. Abnormal temperature inside this product.
77 Additional Information Display Cause Remedy Time short TOC ERR Track full Note: ⢠Should any other error messages appear, refer to âÂÂUnderstanding music server error messagesâ on page 75. ⢠The TOC (Table of Contents) consists of information other than the audio signalâÂÂsuch as the number of recorded tracks, playing time and titleâÂÂon CD and MD discs, etc. ⢠The FAT (File Allocation Table) defines the parameters for managing music data and playlist files on the music server and âÂÂMemory StickâÂÂ, etc. U nderstanding âÂÂMemor y Stickâ player error messages Display Cause Remedy ERROR- 24 STICK ERROR- 24 ERROR- 27 STICK ERROR- 27 ERROR- 30, A0, A1, B0 STICK ERROR- 30, A0, A1, B0 ERROR- 55 STICK WRITE ERROR CanâÂÂt play WARNING- 14 Expired FORMAT ERROR There is something wrong with the âÂÂMemory StickâÂÂ. The âÂÂMemory Stickâ has been inserted upside-down or back- to-front. Electrical or mechanical prob- lem. Somehow the track information was not written correctly. The music data cannot be played back. The music data has exceeded the playback limit (playback time or number of plays). A âÂÂMemory Stickâ other than an âÂÂMG Memory Stickâ is inserted. A âÂÂMemory Stickâ formatted in such a way as to be unable to be played back in this product is inserted (such as a âÂÂMemory Stickâ formatted on a PC). Replace the âÂÂMemory StickâÂÂ. Remove âÂÂMemory StickâÂÂ, align cor- rectly and reinsert. If message reappears, replace the âÂÂMemory StickâÂÂ. Turn the car ignition ON and OFF, or switch to a different source, then switch back to the âÂÂMemory Stickâ player. Repeat operation. If message reappears, replace the âÂÂMemory StickâÂÂ. Switch to other music data. Switch to other music data. Replace the âÂÂMG Memory StickâÂÂ. Remove the âÂÂMemory Stickâ and insert it again. If message reap- pears, replace the âÂÂMemory StickâÂÂ. The time remaining on the music server is shorter than the disc or tracks to be record- ed. The CDâÂÂs TOC is unreadable. You try to record more than 400 tracks in a single playlist file. Erase unwanted tracks. Replace disc. Cancel record standby.
Display Cause Remedy MS Locked Protected No audio No Stick Stick full STICK READ ERROR WARNING- 16 78 ENGLISH ESPAÃÂOL DEUTSCH FRANÃÂAIS ITALIANO NEDERLANDS The erasure prevention switch is set to LOCK. A âÂÂMG Memory Stickâ with no music data on it has been inserted, or a âÂÂMemory Stickâ other than a âÂÂMG Memory Stickâ has been inserted. The âÂÂMemory Stickâ is not inserted. There is insufficient empty space on the âÂÂMemory StickâÂÂ. Somehow track information was not read in correctly. There is something wrong with the âÂÂMemory StickâÂÂ. There is no playback permis- sion for music data procured by electronic distribution, such as over the Internet. Cancel the erasure prevention switch. Insert a âÂÂMG Memory Stickâ with music data on it. Insert the âÂÂMemory Stick.â Replace the âÂÂMemory Stickâ or erase unwanted music data. Remove the âÂÂMemory Stickâ and insert it again. If message reap- pears, replace the âÂÂMemory StickâÂÂ. Switch to other music data.
79 Additional Information T erms A TRAC3 Short for âÂÂAdaptive Transform Acoustic Coding3âÂÂ. This is an audio compression tech- nology for high-quality and high compression. It is possible to compress music data to about 1/10th the level of a CD, allowing miniaturiza- tion of storage media. Bit rate This expresses data volume per second, or bps units (bits per second). The higher the rate, the more information is available to reproduce the sound. Using the same encoding method (such as ATRAC3), the higher the rate, the better the sound. (As different encoding methods are use for MP3 and ATRAC3, a simple comparison is impossible.) ID3 T ag This is a method of embedding track-related information in a MP3 file. This embedded infor- mation can include the track title, the artistâÂÂs name, the album title, the music genre, the year of production, comments and other data. The contents can be freely edited using software with ID3 Tag editing functions. Although the tags are restricted to the number of characters, the information can be viewed when the track is played back. ISO9660 format This is the international standard for the format logic of CD-ROM folders and files. For the ISO9660 format, there are regulations for the following two levels. Level 1: The file name is in 8.3 format (the name con- sists of up to 8 characters, half-byte English capital letters and half-byte numerals and the âÂÂ_â sign, with a file-extension of three charac- ters.) Level 2: The file name can have up to 31 characters (including the separation mark âÂÂ.â and a file extension). Each folder contains less than 8 hierarchies. Extended formats Joliet: File names can have up to 64 characters. Romeo: File names can have up to 128 characters. m3u Playlists created using the âÂÂWINAMPâ software have a playlist file extension (.m3u). MagicGate Data recorded on a âÂÂMagicGate Memory Stick (MG Memory Stick)â is encrypted using copy- right protection technology and can be mutually authenticated with âÂÂMG Memory Stickâ compati- ble equipment. A âÂÂMG Memory Stickâ can only be used to record and playback when there is verification between the âÂÂMG Memory Stickâ and the compatible equipment. âÂÂMagicGate Memor y Stickâ This is the name used for a âÂÂMemory Stickâ that uses the âÂÂMagicGateâ copyright protection tech- nology. This is an IC recording media for recording and playback of music and other data requiring copyright protection technology.
âÂÂMemor y Stickâ This is a compact, light-weight IC recording medium. The âÂÂMemory Stickâ is a regular âÂÂMemory Stickâ without the copyright protection technology used in the âÂÂMagicGate Memory Stick.â The âÂÂMemory Stickâ can be used to record image and audio data, etc. with âÂÂMemory Stickâ compatible equipment. Different types of data can be recorded on a single âÂÂMemory Stick.â MP3 MP3 is short for MPEG Audio Layer3. It is an audio compression standard set by a working group (MPEG) of the ISO (International Standards Organization). MP3 is able to com- press audio data to about 1/10th the level of a conventional disc. Multi-session Multi-session is a recording method that allows additional data to be recorded later. When recording data on a CD-ROM, CD-R or CD-RW, etc., all data from beginning to end is treated as a single unit or session. Multi-session is a method of recording more than 2 sessions in one disc. Packet write This is a general term for a method of writing on CD-R, etc. at the time required for a file, just as is done with files on floppy or hard discs. SCMS SCMS is short for Serial Copy Management System. This is a serial copy management sys- tem developed to stop serial copying (copying of copies) of music, including copying of music recorded digitally from CDs etc. to a hard disk (music server). SDMI SDMI is short for Secure Digital Music Initiative. In order to develop a uniform system of copy- right protection technology that can be used around the world, more than about 130 compa- nies and organization representing the record- ing, computer and consumer electronics indus- tries have created a form. The objective is to prevent illegal use of music data and to pro- mote the development of legitimate music distri- bution services. The âÂÂMagicGateâ copyright pro- tection technology is standard based on SDMI regulations. VBR VBR is short for Variable Bit Rate. Generally speaking CBR (Constant Bit Rate) is more widely used. But to flexibly adjust the bit rate according to the needs of audio compression, it is possible to achieve compression priorities sound quality. 80 ENGLISH ESPAÃÂOL DEUTSCH FRANÃÂAIS ITALIANO NEDERLANDS
81 Additional Information S pecifications General Power source .............. 14.4 V DC (10.8 â 15.1 V allowable) Grounding system .......................................... Negative type Max. current consumption ........................................ 10.0 A Dimensions (DIN) (chassis) ...... 178 (W) à50 (H) à155 (D) mm [7 (W) à2 (H) à6-1/8 (D) in.] (nose) ............ 188 (W) à58 (H) à37 (D) mm [7-3/8 (W) à2-1/4 (H) à1-1/2 (D) in.] (D) (chassis) ...... 178 (W) à50 (H) à160 (D) mm [7 (W) à2 (H) à6-1/4 (D) in.] (nose) ............ 170 (W) à46 (H) à32 (D) mm [6-3/4 (W) à1-3/4 (H) à1-1/4 (D) in.] Weight (main body) ........................................ 1.9 kg (4.2 lbs.) (power box) ...................................................... 0.2 kg Audio/DSP Continuous power output is 22 W per channel min. into 4 ohms, both channels driven 50 to 15,000 Hz with no more than 5% THD. Maximum power output ...................................... 50 W à4 Load impedance ............................ 4 ⦠(4 â 8 ⦠allowable) Preout maximum output level/ output impedance ...................................... 2.2 V/1 k ⦠Loudness contour ........ 10 dB (100 Hz), 6.5 dB (10 kHz) (volume: âÂÂ30 dB) Equalizer (13-Band Graphic Equalizer) Frequency .................. 50/80/125/200/315/500/800 Hz 1.25/2/3.15/5/8/12.5 kHz Equalization range ................................ ñ12 dB (2 dB) Auto Equalizer (Front & Rear & Subwoofer 13-Band Graphic) Frequency .................. 50/80/125/200/315/500/800 Hz 1.25/2/3.15/5/8/12.5 kHz Equalization range ...................... 6 â âÂÂ12 dB (2 dB) Network HPF (Front/Rear) Frequency .......................... 50/63/80/100/125 Hz Slope ................................................ âÂÂ12 dB/oct. Subwoofer output Frequency .......................... 50/63/80/100/125 Hz Slope ................................................ âÂÂ18 dB/oct. Gain .............................. âÂÂ24 dB â 6 dB (1 dB) Phase ........................................ Normal/Reverse CD player System .................................... Compact disc audio system Usable discs .................................................. Compact disc Signal format ...................... Sampling frequency: 44.1 kHz Number of quantization bits: 16; linear Frequency characteristics ................ 5 â 20,000 Hz ( ñ1 dB) Signal-to-noise ratio ............ 94 dB (1 kHz) (IHF-A network) Dynamic range .............................................. 92 dB (1 kHz) MP3 decoding ................................ MPEG 1 Audio Layer 3 Number of channels ............................................ 2 (stereo) HDD HDD quantity ............................................................ 10 GB Codec .................................................................... ATRAC3 Frequency characteristics .............. 20 â 20,000 Hz (ñ1 dB) Average seek time ................................................ 13 msec. âÂÂMemor y Stickâ player Type ............................................ MagicGate Memory Stick Decording .............................................................. ATRAC3 Frequency characteristics .............. 20 â 20,000 Hz (ñ1 dB)
FM tuner Frequency range ...................................... 87.9 â 107.9 MHz Usable sensitivity ........................................................ 9 dBf (0.8 õ V/75 â¦, mono, S/N: 30 dB) 50 dB quieting sensitivity ...... 15 dBf (1.5 õ V/75 ⦠, mono) Signal-to-noise ratio ........................ 70 dB (IHF-A network) Distortion ............................ 0.3% (at 65 dBf, 1 kHz, stereo) Frequency response ...................... 30 â 15,000 Hz (ñ3 dB) Stereo separation .......................... 40 dB (at 65 dBf, 1 kHz) Selectivity ...................................................... 70 dB (2ACA) Three-signal intermodulation (desired signal level) ........................................ 30 dBf (two undesired signal level: 100 dBf) AM tuner Frequency range ......................... 530 â 1,710 kHz (10 kHz) Usable sensitivity .................................. 18 õV (S/N: 20 dB) Selectivity .................................................. 50 dB (ñ10 kHz) Note: ⢠Specifications and design are subject to modifica- tion without notice for the sake of improvements. 82 ENGLISH ESPAÃÂOL DEUTSCH FRANÃÂAIS ITALIANO NEDERLANDS
PIONEER CORPORATION 4-1, MEGURO 1-CHOME, MEGURO-KU, TOKYO 153-8654, JAPAN PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC. P.O. Box 1540, Long Beach, California 90801-1540, U.S.A. TEL: (800) 421-1404 PIONEER EUROPE NV Haven 1087, Keetberglaan 1, B-9120 Melsele, Belgium TEL: (0) 3/570.05.11 PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIACENTRE PTE. LTD. 253 Alexandra Road, #04-01, Singapore 159936 TEL: 65-472-1111 PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD. 178-184 Boundary Road, Braeside, Victoria 3195, Australia TEL: (03) 9586-6300 PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC. 300 Allstate Parkway, Markham, Ontario L3R OP2, Canada TEL: (905) 479-4411 PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO, S.A. de C.V. San Lorenzo 1009 3er. Piso Desp. 302 Col. Del Valle Mexico, D.F. C.P. 03100 TEL: 5-688-52-90 Published by Pioneer Corporation. Copyright é 2001 by Pioneer Corporation. All rights reserved. Publication de Pioneer Corporation. Copyright é 2001 Pioneer Corporation. Tous droits de reproduction et de traduction réservés. Printed in Japan Imprimé au Japon <CRD3472-B> UC <KMMUF/01K00001>
DEH-P90HDD Printed in Japan Imprimé au Japon <CRD3473-A> UC This product conforms to CEMA cord colors. Le code de couleur des câbles utilisé pour ce produit est conforme àCEMA. INST ALLA TION MANUAL MANUEL DâÂÂINST ALLA TION <KMMUF/01K00000> Fig. 2 Y ellow/black If you use a cellular telephone, connect it via the Audio Mute lead on the cellular telephone. If not, keep the Audio Mute lead free of any connections. Y ellow T o terminal always supplied with power regardless of ignition switch position. Red T o electric terminal controlled by ignition switch (12 V DC) ON/OFF . Fuse holder Fuse resistor Fuse resistor Orange/white T o lighting switch terminal. Black (ground) T o vehicle (metal) body. Connecting cords with RCA pin plugs (sold separately) Power amp (sold separately) Blue/white T o system control terminal of the power amp or Auto- antenna relay control terminal (max. 300 mA 12 V DC). System remote control Front speaker White White/black Gray Gray/black Left Right Rear speaker Green Green/black V iolet V iolet/black Subwoofer With a 2 speaker system, do not connect anything to the speaker leads that are not connected to speakers. Perform these connections when using a different amp (sold separately). Antenna jack 15 cm (5/8 inch) This Product Subwoofer output (SUBWOOFER OUTPUT) Rear output (REAR OUTPUT) Front output (FRONT OUTPUT) IP-BUS input (Blue) Multi-CD player (sold separately) IP-BUS cable Power box Power box cord 1 m (3-7/8 inch) Power amp (sold separately) Power amp (sold separately) Front speaker Front speaker Front speaker Rear speaker Rear speaker Rear speaker Subwoofer 1 m (3-7/8 inch) 15 cm (5/8 inch) 15 cm (5/8 inch) â â â â â â â â â â Auto-equalizing mike jack Pull the auto-equalizing mike jack out of the console box, so that the mike can be plugged in or pulled out even after this unit has been installed. Install the power box cord securely so that the cord can not be easily pulled out. Note: ⢠This unit is for vehicles with a 12-volt battery and negative grounding. Before installing it in a recre- ational vehicle, truck, or bus, check the battery voltage. ⢠To avoid shorts in the electrical system, be sure to disconnect the â battery cable before beginning installation. ⢠Refer to the ownerâÂÂs manual for details on con- necting the power amp and other units, then make connections correctly. ⢠Secure the wiring with cable clamps or adhesive tape. To protect the wiring, wrap adhesive tape around them where they lie against metal parts. ⢠Route and secure all wiring so it cannot touch any moving parts, such as the gear shift, handbrake, and seat rails. Do not route wiring in places that get hot, such as near the heater outlet. If the insula- tion of the wiring melts or gets torn, there is a dan- ger of the wiring short-circuiting to the vehicle body. ⢠DonâÂÂt pass the yellow lead through a hole into the engine compartment to connect to the battery. This will damage the lead insulation and cause a very dangerous short. ⢠Do not shorten any leads. If you do, the protection circuit may fail to work when it should. ⢠Never feed power to other equipment by cutting the insulation of the power supply lead of the unit and tapping into the lead. The current capacity of the lead will be exceeded, causing overheating. ⢠When replacing fuse, be sure to use only fuse of the rating prescribed on the fuse holder. ⢠Since a unique BPTL circuit is employed, never wire so the speaker leads are directly grounded or the left and right â speaker leads are common. ⢠If the RCA pin jack on the unit will not be used, do not remove the caps attached to the end of the con- nector. ⢠Speakers connected to this unit must be high- power types with minimum rating of 50 W and impedance of 4 to 8 ohms. Connecting speakers with output and/or impedance values other than those noted here may result in the speakers catch- ing fire, emitting smoke, or becoming damaged. ⢠When this productâÂÂs source is switched ON, a con- trol signal is output through the blue/white lead. Connect to an external power ampâÂÂs system remote control or the carâÂÂs Auto-antenna relay control ter- minal (max. 300 mA 12 V DC). If the car features a glass antenna, connect to the antenna booster power supply terminal. ⢠When an external power amp is being used with this system, be sure not to connect the blue/white lead to the ampâÂÂs power terminal. Likewise, do not connect the blue/white lead to the power terminal of the auto-antenna. Such connection could cause excessive current drain and malfunction. ⢠To avoid short-circuiting, cover the disconnected lead with insulating tape. Especially, insulate the unused speaker leads without fail. There is a possi- bility of short-circuiting if the leads are not insulat- ed. ⢠To prevent incorrect connection, the input side of the IP-BUS connector is blue, and the output side is black. Connect the connectors of the same colors correctly. ⢠If this unit is installed in a vehicle that does not have an ACC (accessory) position on the ignition switch, the red lead of the unit should be connected to a terminal coupled with ignition switch ON/OFF operations. If this is not done, the vehicle battery may be drained when you are away from the vehi- cle for several hours. (Fig. 1) Fig. 1 ⢠The black lead is ground. Please ground this lead separately from the ground of high-current prod- ucts such as power amps. If you ground the products together and the ground becomes detached, there is a risk of damage to the products or fire. No ACC position ACC position O N S T A R T O F F A C C O N S T A R T O F F DEH-P90HDD Printed in Japan Imprimé au Japon <CRD3473-A> UC Connecting the Units <ENGLISH> This product conforms to CEMA cord colors. Le code de couleur des câbles utilisé pour ce produit est conforme àCEMA. ⢠Cords for this product and those for other prod- ucts may be different colors even if they have the same function. When connecting this product to another product, refer to the supplied Installation manuals of both products and connect cords that have the same function. INST ALLA TION MANUAL MANUEL DâÂÂINST ALLA TION <KMMUF/01K00000>
DEH-P90HDD Printed in Japan Imprimé au Japon <CRD3473-A> UC This product conforms to CEMA cord colors. Le code de couleur des câbles utilisé pour ce produit est conforme àCEMA. INST ALLA TION MANUAL MANUEL DâÂÂINST ALLA TION <KMMUF/01K00000> Fig. 2 Y ellow/black If you use a cellular telephone, connect it via the Audio Mute lead on the cellular telephone. If not, keep the Audio Mute lead free of any connections. Y ellow T o terminal always supplied with power regardless of ignition switch position. Red T o electric terminal controlled by ignition switch (12 V DC) ON/OFF . Fuse holder Fuse resistor Fuse resistor Orange/white T o lighting switch terminal. Black (ground) T o vehicle (metal) body. Connecting cords with RCA pin plugs (sold separately) Power amp (sold separately) Blue/white T o system control terminal of the power amp or Auto- antenna relay control terminal (max. 300 mA 12 V DC). System remote control Front speaker White White/black Gray Gray/black Left Right Rear speaker Green Green/black V iolet V iolet/black Subwoofer With a 2 speaker system, do not connect anything to the speaker leads that are not connected to speakers. Perform these connections when using a different amp (sold separately). Antenna jack 15 cm (5/8 inch) This Product Subwoofer output (SUBWOOFER OUTPUT) Rear output (REAR OUTPUT) Front output (FRONT OUTPUT) IP-BUS input (Blue) Multi-CD player (sold separately) IP-BUS cable Power box Power box cord 1 m (3-7/8 inch) Power amp (sold separately) Power amp (sold separately) Front speaker Front speaker Front speaker Rear speaker Rear speaker Rear speaker Subwoofer 1 m (3-7/8 inch) 15 cm (5/8 inch) 15 cm (5/8 inch) â â â â â â â â â â Auto-equalizing mike jack Pull the auto-equalizing mike jack out of the console box, so that the mike can be plugged in or pulled out even after this unit has been installed. Install the power box cord securely so that the cord can not be easily pulled out. Note: ⢠This unit is for vehicles with a 12-volt battery and negative grounding. Before installing it in a recre- ational vehicle, truck, or bus, check the battery voltage. ⢠To avoid shorts in the electrical system, be sure to disconnect the â battery cable before beginning installation. ⢠Refer to the ownerâÂÂs manual for details on con- necting the power amp and other units, then make connections correctly. ⢠Secure the wiring with cable clamps or adhesive tape. To protect the wiring, wrap adhesive tape around them where they lie against metal parts. ⢠Route and secure all wiring so it cannot touch any moving parts, such as the gear shift, handbrake, and seat rails. Do not route wiring in places that get hot, such as near the heater outlet. If the insula- tion of the wiring melts or gets torn, there is a dan- ger of the wiring short-circuiting to the vehicle body. ⢠DonâÂÂt pass the yellow lead through a hole into the engine compartment to connect to the battery. This will damage the lead insulation and cause a very dangerous short. ⢠Do not shorten any leads. If you do, the protection circuit may fail to work when it should. ⢠Never feed power to other equipment by cutting the insulation of the power supply lead of the unit and tapping into the lead. The current capacity of the lead will be exceeded, causing overheating. ⢠When replacing fuse, be sure to use only fuse of the rating prescribed on the fuse holder. ⢠Since a unique BPTL circuit is employed, never wire so the speaker leads are directly grounded or the left and right â speaker leads are common. ⢠If the RCA pin jack on the unit will not be used, do not remove the caps attached to the end of the con- nector. ⢠Speakers connected to this unit must be high- power types with minimum rating of 50 W and impedance of 4 to 8 ohms. Connecting speakers with output and/or impedance values other than those noted here may result in the speakers catch- ing fire, emitting smoke, or becoming damaged. ⢠When this productâÂÂs source is switched ON, a con- trol signal is output through the blue/white lead. Connect to an external power ampâÂÂs system remote control or the carâÂÂs Auto-antenna relay control ter- minal (max. 300 mA 12 V DC). If the car features a glass antenna, connect to the antenna booster power supply terminal. ⢠When an external power amp is being used with this system, be sure not to connect the blue/white lead to the ampâÂÂs power terminal. Likewise, do not connect the blue/white lead to the power terminal of the auto-antenna. Such connection could cause excessive current drain and malfunction. ⢠To avoid short-circuiting, cover the disconnected lead with insulating tape. Especially, insulate the unused speaker leads without fail. There is a possi- bility of short-circuiting if the leads are not insulat- ed. ⢠To prevent incorrect connection, the input side of the IP-BUS connector is blue, and the output side is black. Connect the connectors of the same colors correctly. ⢠If this unit is installed in a vehicle that does not have an ACC (accessory) position on the ignition switch, the red lead of the unit should be connected to a terminal coupled with ignition switch ON/OFF operations. If this is not done, the vehicle battery may be drained when you are away from the vehi- cle for several hours. (Fig. 1) Fig. 1 ⢠The black lead is ground. Please ground this lead separately from the ground of high-current prod- ucts such as power amps. If you ground the products together and the ground becomes detached, there is a risk of damage to the products or fire. No ACC position ACC position O N S T A R T O F F A C C O N S T A R T O F F DEH-P90HDD Printed in Japan Imprimé au Japon <CRD3473-A> UC Connecting the Units <ENGLISH> This product conforms to CEMA cord colors. Le code de couleur des câbles utilisé pour ce produit est conforme àCEMA. ⢠Cords for this product and those for other prod- ucts may be different colors even if they have the same function. When connecting this product to another product, refer to the supplied Installation manuals of both products and connect cords that have the same function. INST ALLA TION MANUAL MANUEL DâÂÂINST ALLA TION <KMMUF/01K00000>
A T itle (English) Installation without the rubber bush (Fig. 6) Fig. 6 Removing the Unit (Fig. 7) (Fig. 8) Fig. 7 Fig. 8 Nut (5 mm) Dashboard Drill a 5.5 â 6.0 mm diameter hole. Screw (5 à16 mm) Nut (5 mm) Screw Strap Be sure to use the strap to secure the back of the unit in place. The strap can be bent by hand to the desired angle. Insert the release pin into the hole in the bottom of the frame and pull out to remove the frame. (When reattaching the frame, point the side with a groove downwards and attach it.) Frame Insert the supplied extraction keys into the unit, as shown in the figure, until they click into place. Keeping the keys pressed against the sides of the unit, pull the unit out. Installation <ENGLISH> Note: ⢠Before finally installing the unit, connect the wiring temporarily, making sure it is all connected up properly, and the unit and the system work properly. ⢠Use only the parts included with the unit to ensure proper installation. The use of unauthorized parts can cause malfunctions. ⢠Consult with your nearest dealer if installation requires the drilling of holes or other modifications of the vehicle. ⢠Install the unit where it does not get in the driverâÂÂs way and cannot injure the passenger if there is a sudden stop, like an emergency stop. ⢠The semiconductor laser will be damaged if it overheats, so donâÂÂt install the unit anywhere hot â for instance, near a heater outlet. ⢠If installation angle exceeds 30ð from horizontal, the unit might not give its optimum performance. (Fig. 3) Fig. 3 ⢠This unit and the GPS antenna of the navigation unit should be set as far apart as possible. If they are too close, this unit and the navigation unit may not operate correctly. ⢠Do not install the power box near doors where rainwater could splash onto it. ⢠As the power box can heat up, it should never be installed in the following locations: â where it could come into contact with car wiring or equipment â where it would easily come into contact with passengers. ⢠This unit must be installed after pulling the auto- equalizing mike jack out of the console box, so that the mike can be plugged in or pulled out even after this unit has been installed. ⢠The cords must not cover up the area shown in Fig. 2. This is so the amplifiers can radiate freely. Fig. 4 Do not close this area. 30 ð DIN Front/Rear -mount This unit can be properly installed either from âÂÂFrontâ (conventional DIN Front-mount) or âÂÂRearâ (DIN Rear-mount installation, utilizing threaded screw holes at the sides of unit chassis). For details, refer to the following illustrated installation methods. DIN Front-mount Installation with the rubber bush (Fig. 5) Fig. 5 Holder After inserting the holder into the dash- board, then select the appropriate tabs according to the thickness of the dash- board material and bend them. (Install as firmly as possible using the top and bottom tabs. T o secure, bend the tabs 90 degrees.) 182 53 Rubber bush Screw Dashboard DIN Rear -mount Installation using the screw holes on the side of the unit 1. Remove the frame. (Fig. 9) Fig. 9 2. Fastening the unit to the factory radio mounting bracket. (Fig. 10) (Fig. 11) Select a position where the screw holes of the bracket and the screw holes of the head unit become aligned (are fitted), and tighten the screws at 2 places on each side. Use either binding screws (5 à8 mm) or flush surface screws (5 à8 mm), depending on the shape of the screw holes in the bracket . Fig. 10 Fig. 11 Frame Insert the release pin into the hole in the bottom of the frame and pull out to remove the frame. (When reattaching the frame, point the side with a groove downwards and attach it.) Screw Dashboard or Console Factory radio mounting bracket
A T itle (English) Installation without the rubber bush (Fig. 6) Fig. 6 Removing the Unit (Fig. 7) (Fig. 8) Fig. 7 Fig. 8 Nut (5 mm) Dashboard Drill a 5.5 â 6.0 mm diameter hole. Screw (5 à16 mm) Nut (5 mm) Screw Strap Be sure to use the strap to secure the back of the unit in place. The strap can be bent by hand to the desired angle. Insert the release pin into the hole in the bottom of the frame and pull out to remove the frame. (When reattaching the frame, point the side with a groove downwards and attach it.) Frame Insert the supplied extraction keys into the unit, as shown in the figure, until they click into place. Keeping the keys pressed against the sides of the unit, pull the unit out. Installation <ENGLISH> Note: ⢠Before finally installing the unit, connect the wiring temporarily, making sure it is all connected up properly, and the unit and the system work properly. ⢠Use only the parts included with the unit to ensure proper installation. The use of unauthorized parts can cause malfunctions. ⢠Consult with your nearest dealer if installation requires the drilling of holes or other modifications of the vehicle. ⢠Install the unit where it does not get in the driverâÂÂs way and cannot injure the passenger if there is a sudden stop, like an emergency stop. ⢠The semiconductor laser will be damaged if it overheats, so donâÂÂt install the unit anywhere hot â for instance, near a heater outlet. ⢠If installation angle exceeds 30ð from horizontal, the unit might not give its optimum performance. (Fig. 3) Fig. 3 ⢠This unit and the GPS antenna of the navigation unit should be set as far apart as possible. If they are too close, this unit and the navigation unit may not operate correctly. ⢠Do not install the power box near doors where rainwater could splash onto it. ⢠As the power box can heat up, it should never be installed in the following locations: â where it could come into contact with car wiring or equipment â where it would easily come into contact with passengers. ⢠This unit must be installed after pulling the auto- equalizing mike jack out of the console box, so that the mike can be plugged in or pulled out even after this unit has been installed. ⢠The cords must not cover up the area shown in Fig. 2. This is so the amplifiers can radiate freely. Fig. 4 Do not close this area. 30 ð DIN Front/Rear -mount This unit can be properly installed either from âÂÂFrontâ (conventional DIN Front-mount) or âÂÂRearâ (DIN Rear-mount installation, utilizing threaded screw holes at the sides of unit chassis). For details, refer to the following illustrated installation methods. DIN Front-mount Installation with the rubber bush (Fig. 5) Fig. 5 Holder After inserting the holder into the dash- board, then select the appropriate tabs according to the thickness of the dash- board material and bend them. (Install as firmly as possible using the top and bottom tabs. T o secure, bend the tabs 90 degrees.) 182 53 Rubber bush Screw Dashboard DIN Rear -mount Installation using the screw holes on the side of the unit 1. Remove the frame. (Fig. 9) Fig. 9 2. Fastening the unit to the factory radio mounting bracket. (Fig. 10) (Fig. 11) Select a position where the screw holes of the bracket and the screw holes of the head unit become aligned (are fitted), and tighten the screws at 2 places on each side. Use either binding screws (5 à8 mm) or flush surface screws (5 à8 mm), depending on the shape of the screw holes in the bracket . Fig. 10 Fig. 11 Frame Insert the release pin into the hole in the bottom of the frame and pull out to remove the frame. (When reattaching the frame, point the side with a groove downwards and attach it.) Screw Dashboard or Console Factory radio mounting bracket
Installing the Unit on a Left-Hand- Drive Car Note: ⢠When the unit is installed on a right-hand-drive car, the horizontal positions are inverted. 1. Secure inner holder to the inner cir- cumference of the steering wheel with belt. (Fig. 15) ⢠Fit the inner holder to the steering wheel so that the arrow-marked side faces the driver as shown below. Fig. 15 2. Cut the extra portion of the belt at the center of the inner holder. (Fig. 16) Fig. 16 3. Install outer holder on the inner holder and secure with screws. (Fig. 17) ⢠Tighten the screws with the supplied hexago- nal wrench. Fig. 17 4. Install the remote control unit in the holder. (Fig. 18) ⢠When removing the remote control unit from the holder, move the corrugated release sec- tion toward the steering wheel and slide the remote control unit toward you. Fig. 18 WARNING ⢠Avoid installing this unit in such a location where the operation of safety devices such as airbags is prevented by this unit. Otherwise, there is a danger of a fatal accident. ⢠Avoid installing this unit in such a location where the operation of the steering wheel and the gearshift lever may be prevented. Otherwise, it may result in a traffic accident. CAUTION ⢠Installation of this unit requires specialized skills and experience. Installation of this unit should be entrusted to a dealer from whom you purchased this unit. ⢠Install this unit using only the parts supplied with this unit. If other parts are used, this unit may be damaged or could dismount itself, which leads to an accident or trouble. ⢠Install this unit as required by this manual. Failure to do so may cause an accident. ⢠Do not install this unit near the doors where rain- water is likely to be spilled on the unit. Incursion of water into the unit may cause smoke or fire. WARNING ⢠Fix this unit securely to the steering wheel with the belt attached to the unit. If this unit is loose, it dis- turbs driving stability, which may result in a traffic accident. ⢠Do not attach this unit to the outer circumference of the steering wheel. Otherwise, it disturbs dri- ving stability, causing a traffic accident. Always attach this unit to the inner circumference of the steering wheel as shown. (Fig. 14) Note: ⢠Do not install this unit in such a place as may obstruct the driverâÂÂs view. ⢠Since interior layout differs depending on the type of vehicle, the ideal installation location for the unit also differs. When installing the unit, select a location that assures optimum transmission of sig- nals from the unit to the car stereo. Fig. 14 Belt Inner holder Screw Outer holder Release Section Installing the Steering Remote Control Unit <ENGLISH> Installation <ENGLISH> Installing the power box (Fig. 12) The power box has velcro tape on the underside to secure it to the car mat. ⢠Wipe the surface thoroughly before affixing the velcro tape. Fig. 12 About the fixing screws for the front panel (Fig. 13) If you do not operate the Detaching and Replacing the Front Panel Function, use the sup- plied fixing screws and fix the front panel to this unit. Fig. 13 V elcro tape Car mat Fixing screw
Installing the Unit on a Left-Hand- Drive Car Note: ⢠When the unit is installed on a right-hand-drive car, the horizontal positions are inverted. 1. Secure inner holder to the inner cir- cumference of the steering wheel with belt. (Fig. 15) ⢠Fit the inner holder to the steering wheel so that the arrow-marked side faces the driver as shown below. Fig. 15 2. Cut the extra portion of the belt at the center of the inner holder. (Fig. 16) Fig. 16 3. Install outer holder on the inner holder and secure with screws. (Fig. 17) ⢠Tighten the screws with the supplied hexago- nal wrench. Fig. 17 4. Install the remote control unit in the holder. (Fig. 18) ⢠When removing the remote control unit from the holder, move the corrugated release sec- tion toward the steering wheel and slide the remote control unit toward you. Fig. 18 WARNING ⢠Avoid installing this unit in such a location where the operation of safety devices such as airbags is prevented by this unit. Otherwise, there is a danger of a fatal accident. ⢠Avoid installing this unit in such a location where the operation of the steering wheel and the gearshift lever may be prevented. Otherwise, it may result in a traffic accident. CAUTION ⢠Installation of this unit requires specialized skills and experience. Installation of this unit should be entrusted to a dealer from whom you purchased this unit. ⢠Install this unit using only the parts supplied with this unit. If other parts are used, this unit may be damaged or could dismount itself, which leads to an accident or trouble. ⢠Install this unit as required by this manual. Failure to do so may cause an accident. ⢠Do not install this unit near the doors where rain- water is likely to be spilled on the unit. Incursion of water into the unit may cause smoke or fire. WARNING ⢠Fix this unit securely to the steering wheel with the belt attached to the unit. If this unit is loose, it dis- turbs driving stability, which may result in a traffic accident. ⢠Do not attach this unit to the outer circumference of the steering wheel. Otherwise, it disturbs dri- ving stability, causing a traffic accident. Always attach this unit to the inner circumference of the steering wheel as shown. (Fig. 14) Note: ⢠Do not install this unit in such a place as may obstruct the driverâÂÂs view. ⢠Since interior layout differs depending on the type of vehicle, the ideal installation location for the unit also differs. When installing the unit, select a location that assures optimum transmission of sig- nals from the unit to the car stereo. Fig. 14 Belt Inner holder Screw Outer holder Release Section Installing the Steering Remote Control Unit <ENGLISH> Installation <ENGLISH> Installing the power box (Fig. 12) The power box has velcro tape on the underside to secure it to the car mat. ⢠Wipe the surface thoroughly before affixing the velcro tape. Fig. 12 About the fixing screws for the front panel (Fig. 13) If you do not operate the Detaching and Replacing the Front Panel Function, use the sup- plied fixing screws and fix the front panel to this unit. Fig. 13 V elcro tape Car mat Fixing screw
1 Contents Dear Customer ............................ 4 Key Finder .................................. 5 Before Using This Product .............. 6 Features .............................................................. 6 About this product .............................................. 7 About this manual .............................................. 7 Important .......................................................... 7 Precaution .......................................................... 7 After-sales service for Pioneer products ............ 8 About the XM READY mark ................................ 8 Resetting the microprocessor ............................ 9 About the demo modes ...................................... 9 About basic displays .......................................... 9 Remote controller and care .............................. 10 Using the steering remote controller ................ 11 Displaying and setting the clock ...................... 12 Detaching and replacing the front panel .......... 13 Basic Operation .......................... 14 Turning a source on or off ................................ 14 SOFT KEY operation ........................................ 14 Key guidance indicator .................................... 16 Tuner ...................................... 17 Display and indicators ...................................... 17 Basic operation ................................................ 17 Storing and recalling broadcast stations .......... 17 Tuner function menu ........................................ 18 Storing the strongest broadcast stations .......... 18 Selecting stations from the preset channel list ................................................ 18 Tuning in strong signals .................................. 18 Built-in CD Player ...................... 19 Display and indicators ...................................... 19 Basic operation ................................................ 19 Switching and scrolling the title ...................... 20 Built-in CD player function menu ...................... 20 Repeating play .................................................. 20 Playing tracks in random order ........................ 21 Scanning tracks of a CD .................................. 21 Selecting tracks from the track title list ............ 21 Pausing CD playback ........................................ 22 Entering disc titles ............................................ 22 MP3 Play .................................. 23 Display and indicators ...................................... 23 Basic operation ................................................ 23 Switching and scrolling the title ...................... 24 MP3 function menu .......................................... 24 Repeating play .................................................. 24 Playing tracks in random order ........................ 25 Scanning folders and tracks ............................ 25 Selecting tracks from the track title list ............ 26 Pausing MP3 playback .................................... 26 Music Server Recording ................ 27 Display and indicators ...................................... 27 Before recording .............................................. 27 Recording from the built-in CD ........................ 28 Switching CD information ................................ 29 Recording from a source other than the built-in CD ................................................ 29 Recording function menu ................................ 29 Selecting the recording range .......................... 30 Selecting the recording quality ........................ 30
Music Server Play ...................... 31 Display and indicators ...................................... 31 Basic operation ................................................ 31 Selecting the playlist mode .............................. 31 Using the custom playlist mode ...................... 32 Switching and scrolling the title ...................... 33 Music server function menu ............................ 34 Repeating play .................................................. 34 Playing tracks in random order ........................ 34 Scanning files and tracks ................................ 34 Selecting tracks from the track title list ............ 35 Selecting files from the playlist file title list ...... 35 Pausing music server playback ........................ 35 Entering titles .................................................. 36 Selecting the playlist mode .............................. 37 Deleting tracks and track information .............. 37 âÂÂMemory Stickâ Player ................ 39 Display and indicators ...................................... 39 Basic operation ................................................ 39 Switching and scrolling the title ...................... 40 âÂÂMemory Stickâ player function menu .............. 40 Repeating play .................................................. 40 Playing tracks in random order ........................ 40 Scanning tracks of a âÂÂMemory Stickâ .............. 41 Selecting tracks from the track title list ............ 41 Pausing âÂÂMemory Stickâ playback .................. 41 Erasing tracks from the âÂÂMemory Stickâ .......... 42 Multi-CD Player .......................... 43 Display and indicators ...................................... 43 50-disc multi-CD player .................................... 43 Basic operation ................................................ 43 Selecting a disc directly .................................... 43 Switching and scrolling the title ...................... 44 Multi-CD player function menu ........................ 44 Repeating play .................................................. 44 Playing tracks in random order ........................ 45 Scanning CDs and tracks ................................ 45 Selecting tracks from the track title list ............ 45 Selecting discs from the disc title list .............. 46 Pausing CD playback ........................................ 46 Entering disc titles ............................................ 46 Using compression and dynamic bass emphasis .................................................. 47 Using ITS memory .......................................... 47 DAB Tuner ................................ 49 Display and indicators ...................................... 49 Basic operation ................................................ 49 Storing and recalling services .......................... 50 Changing band ................................................ 50 Switching the display ...................................... 50 Switching the road traffic flash and transport flash on or off ............................................ 50 Dynamic label function .................................... 51 DAB tuner function menu ................................ 51 Setting the announcement support interruption .............................................. 52 Selecting services from the preset service list ................................................ 52 Selecting services from the available service list ................................................ 52 Searching the available PTY ............................ 52 2 ENGLISH ESPAÃÂOL DEUTSCH FRANÃÂAIS ITALIANO NEDERLANDS
3 Contents TV Tuner .................................. 53 Display and indicators ...................................... 53 Basic operation ................................................ 53 Storing and recalling broadcast stations .......... 53 Changing band ................................................ 54 TV tuner function menu .................................... 54 Selecting channels from the preset channel list ................................................ 54 Audio Adjustments ...................... 55 Adjusting the audio easily ................................ 55 Adjusting the audio finely ................................ 55 Extra functions ................................................ 55 Recalling equalizer curves ................................ 55 Audio menu ...................................................... 56 Using balance adjustment ................................ 56 Using loudness ................................................ 56 Using sound field control, octaver and BBE R sound .............................................. 56 Adjusting equalizer curves ................................ 57 Adjusting 13-band graphic equalizer ................ 57 Using automatic sound levelizer ...................... 58 Using position selector .................................... 58 Using time alignment ...................................... 59 Using subwoofer output .................................. 59 Using the high pass filter .................................. 60 Adjusting source levels .................................... 61 Using the auto-equalizer .................................. 61 Switching the digital attenuator ........................ 61 Creating the auto-equalizer curve .................... 61 Initial Settings .......................... 64 Initial settings menu ........................................ 64 Using reverse mode ........................................ 64 Using the feature demo .................................... 64 Switching the auxiliary setting .......................... 64 Switching the telephone muting/attenuation setting ...................................................... 65 Formatting the âÂÂMemory Stickâ ........................ 65 Setting the warning tone .................................. 66 Other Functions .......................... 67 Attenuating volume .......................................... 67 Changing the display form .............................. 67 Adjusting the brightness .................................. 67 Switching the dimmer setting .......................... 67 Selecting the wall paper pattern ...................... 67 Setting the entertainment display .................... 67 Using the AUX source ...................................... 69 Using the telephone muting/ attenuation .......... 69 Additional Information ................ 70 CD player and care .......................................... 70 MP3 files .......................................................... 71 âÂÂMemory Stickâ player and care ...................... 72 Understanding auto-equalizing error messages .................................................. 73 Understanding built-in CD player error messages .................................................. 74 Understanding music server error messages .................................................. 75 Understanding music server error messages when recording ........................................ 76 Understanding âÂÂMemory Stickâ player error messages ........................................ 77 Terms .............................................................. 79 Specifications .................................................. 81
4 ENGLISH ESPAÃÂOL DEUTSCH FRANÃÂAIS ITALIANO NEDERLANDS Selecting fine audio equipment such as the unit youâÂÂve just purchased is only the start of your musical enjoyment. Now itâÂÂs time to consider how you can maximize the fun and excitement your equipment offers. This manufacturer and the Electronic Industries AssociationâÂÂs Consumer Electronics Group want you to get the most out of your equipment by playing it at a safe level. One that lets the sound come through loud and clear without annoying blaring or distortionâÂÂand, most importantly, without affecting your sensitive hearing. Sound can be deceiving. Over time your hearing âÂÂcomfort levelâ adapts to higher volumes of sound. So what sounds âÂÂnormalâ can actually be loud and harmful to your hearing. Guard against this by setting your equipment at a safe level BEFORE your hearing adapts. To establish a safe level: ⢠Start your volume control at a low setting. ⢠Slowly increase the sound until you can hear it comfortably and clearly, and without distor- tion. Once you have established a comfortable sound level: ⢠Set the dial and leave it there. Taking a minute to do this now will help to prevent hearing damage or loss in the future. After all, we want you listening for a lifetime. W e W ant Y ou Listening F or A Lifetime Used wisely, your new sound equipment will provide a lifetime of fun and enjoyment. Since hearing damage from loud noise is often undetectable until it is too late, this manufacturer and the Electronic Industries AssociationâÂÂs Consumer Electronics Group recommend you avoid pro - longed exposure to excessive noise. This list of sound levels is included for your protection. Decibel Level Example 30 Quiet library, soft whispers 40 Living room, refrigerator, bedroom away from traffic 50 Light traffic, normal conversation, quiet office 60 Air conditioner at 20 feet, sewing machine 70 Vacuum cleaner, hair dryer, noisy restaurant 80 Average city traffic, garbage disposals, alarm clock at two feet. THE FOLLOWING NOISES CAN BE DANGEROUS UNDER CONSTANT EXPOSURE 90 Subway, motorcycle, truck traffic, lawn mower 100 Garbage truck, chain saw, pneumatic drill 120 Rock band concert in front of speakers, thunderclap 140 Gunshot blast, jet plane 180 Rocket launching pad Information courtesy of the Deafness Research Foundation.
5 Key Finder Head unit Steering remote controller A steering remote controller that enables remote operation of the head unit is supplied. Operation is the same as when using buttons on the head unit. 5 /â /2 /3 buttons SOURCE button OPEN button VOLUME RESET button Multi-function buttons BAND button BACK button NEXT button FUNCTION button 2 /3 buttons SOURCE button 5 /â buttons AUDIO button VOLUME Raise or lower the volume. BAND button ATT button This lets you quickly lower volume level (by about 90%). Press once more to return to the original volume level. REC button
Before Using This Product F eatures Music ser ver You can record music from the built-in CD play- er or from other audio devices and play them back on the music server. You can also orga- nize and edit favorite tracks, etc. Automatic title retrieval function using Gracenote CDDB (for encoding only) When music is recorded on the music server from the built-in CD, information such as the recording artist and track name is retrieved from the Gracenote CDDB database and displayed. (See page 33.) T ime stamp function When recording music on the music server, it is possible to add a recording date to the music data automatically using this productâÂÂs clock or calendar. (Please set the time and date before using this product.) (See page 12.) âÂÂMemor y Stickâ player The âÂÂMagicGate Memory Stickâ can be used for playback. CD playback It is possible to play back music stored on CD/CD-R/CD-RW formats. MP3 file playback It is possible to play back MP3 files recorded on CD-ROM/CD-R/CD-RW discs (recordings com- plying with ISO9660 Level 1/Level 2 standards). Correspondence to extended format is made with the following conditions. Joliet: Correspondence only to the 8.3 for- mat. Romeo: Correspondence to folder names with up to 64 characters and file names with up to 63 characters (including the extension). (See page 79.) DSP functions The audio feel of actually being at the music venue is recreated by means of such functions as the âÂÂAuto EqualizerâÂÂ, which measures pas- senger cabin audio characteristics and auto- matically compensates to optimize sound quali- ty, and the âÂÂTime Alignment FunctionâÂÂ, which achieves clear sound image positioning. Note: ⢠âÂÂMagicGateâÂÂ, âÂÂMagicGate Memory StickâÂÂ, âÂÂMemory Stickâ and their respective logos are the registered trademarks of Sony Corp. ⢠Windows is a brand name and the trademark of the Microsoft Corporation in the US, North America and other countries. When recording please pay attention to these points: ⢠Please may test recordings of recordings that can not be taken again. ⢠We cannot accept liability for data not recorded or lost due to the failure, improp- er operation or malfunction of this product. ⢠The use of recordings for purposes other than personal enjoyment, etc. are not per- mitted if they infringe copyrights and the rights of copyright claimants without prior consent. 6 ENGLISH ESPAÃÂOL DEUTSCH FRANÃÂAIS ITALIANO NEDERLANDS
7 Before Using This Product A bout this product The tuner frequencies on this product are allo- cated for use in North America. Use in other areas may result in improper reception. Products with voice control functions This productâÂÂs âÂÂMemory Stickâ and the music server have no voice control functions. Tracks recorded on the music server can not be called up by means of voice recognition. A bout this manual This product features a number of sophisticated functions ensuring superior reception and oper- ation. All are designed for the easiest possible use, but many are not self-explanatory. This operation manual is intended to help you bene- fit fully from their potential and to maximize your listening enjoyment. We recommend that you familiarize yourself with the functions and their operation by read- ing through the manual before you use this product. It is especially important that you read and observe the âÂÂPrecautionâ on this page and in other sections. This manual explains head unit operation. You can perform the same operations with the steer- ing remote controller. I mportant The serial number of this device is located on the bottom of this product. For your own securi- ty and convenience, be sure to record this num- ber on the enclosed warranty card. P recaution ⢠Keep this manual handy as a reference for operating procedures and precautions. ⢠Always keep the volume low enough for out- side sounds to be audible. ⢠Protect the product from moisture. ⢠If the battery is disconnected, the preset memory will be erased and must be repro- grammed. CAUTION: USE OF CONTROL OR ADJUSTMENT OR PERFOR- MANCE OF PROCEDURES OTHER THAN THOSE SPECI- FIED HEREIN MAY RESULT IN HAZARDOUS RADIATION EXPOSURE. CAUTION: THE USE OF OPTICAL INSTRU- MENTS WITH THIS PRODUCT WILL INCREASE EYE HAZARD.
A fter -sales service for Pioneer products Please contact the dealer or distributor from where you purchased the product for its after- sales service (including warranty conditions) or any other information. In case the necessary information is not available, please contact the companies listed below: Please do not ship your product to the compa- nies at the addresses listed below for repair without advance contact. For warranty information please see the Limited Warranty sheet included with your product. A bout the XM READY mark The âÂÂXM READYâ mark printed on the front panel of this product indicates that the Pioneer XM tuner (sold separately) can be controlled using this product. Please inquire of your dealer or nearest autho- rized Pioneer service station regarding the XM tuner that can be connected to this product. For operation of the XM tuner, refer to the XM tuner ownerâÂÂs manual. Note: ⢠The XM Satellite Radio is developing a new band of radio in the U.S.A. The system will use direct satellite-to-receiver broadcasting technology to provide listeners in their cars and at home with crystal-clear sound seam- lessly from coast to coast. XM will create and pack- age up to 100 channels of digital-quality music, news, sports, talk and childrenâÂÂs programming. ⢠When this product is connected to the XM tuner, only one external unit can be connected. (Refer to page 14.) ⢠When having this product serviced or repaired, data you have recorded may be lost. Because of the specifications of this product, there can be no compensation for the contents of the recorded data. Please be aware of this beforehand. ⢠There can be no compensation for record- ed data damaged or lost because of trou- bles or defects of this product. (At present, there is no correspondence to backup or repair of music data.) ⢠This product does not support additional hard disk installation or hard disk exchange by the customer. U.S.A. Pioneer Electronics (USA) Inc. CUSTOMER SUPPORT DIVISION P.O. Box 1760 Long Beach, CA 90801-1760 800-421-1404 CANADA Pioneer Electronics of Canada, Inc. CUSTOMER SATISFACTION DEPARTMENT 300 Allstate Parkway Markham, Ontario L3R OP2 (905) 479-4411 1-877-283-5901 8 ENGLISH ESPAÃÂOL DEUTSCH FRANÃÂAIS ITALIANO NEDERLANDS
9 Before Using This Product R esetting the microprocessor The microprocessor must be reset under the following conditions: When using this product for the first time after installation. When the machine fails to operate properly. When strange (incorrect) messages appear on the display. ⢠To reset the microprocessor, press RESET on the head unit with a pen tip or other pointed instrument. Precaution: ⢠After resetting, please set the time and date (see page 12). If the time and date are not set correctly, the music server and the âÂÂMemory Stickâ may not operate correctly. Note: ⢠The recorded contents of the music server are erased when the RESET button is pressed. A bout the demo modes This product features two demonstration modes. One is the reverse mode and the other is the feature demo mode. Reverse mode If you do not carry out an operation within about 30 seconds, screen indications will start to reverse, and then continue reversing every 10 seconds. Pressing the button 5 when power to this product is switched off while the ignition switch is set to ACC or ON cancels the reverse mode. Press the button 5 again to start the reverse mode. Feature demo The feature demo automatically starts when power to this product is switched off while the ignition switch is set to ACC or ON. Pressing the button 6 during feature demo operation can- cels the feature demo mode. Press the button 6 again to start the feature demo mode. Remember that if the feature demo continues operating when the car engine is switched OFF, it may drain battery power. Note: ⢠The red lead (ACC) of this product should be con- nected to a terminal coupled with ignition switch ON or OFF operations. If this is not done, the vehicle battery may be drained. ⢠When the source is off, you can check the location of âÂÂ5â and âÂÂ6â by turning on the feature demo. A bout basic displays This product is equipped with two forms of basic display. You can select the desired dis- play. FORM 1 FORM 2 Note: ⢠For details, refer to âÂÂChanging the display formâ on page 67.
10 ENGLISH ESPAÃÂOL DEUTSCH FRANÃÂAIS ITALIANO NEDERLANDS R emote controller and care Installing the lithium batter y ⢠Remove the cover on the back of the steering remote controller and insert the battery with the ( ) and (âÂÂ) poles pointing in the proper direction. Replacing the lithium batter y ⢠Remove the lithium battery. Precaution: ⢠Replace the battery with a CR2032 lithium battery. ⢠Replace the battery in the unit using a non metallic tapered instrument. W ARNING: ⢠Keep the lithium battery out of the reach of children. Should the battery be swallowed, immediately consult a doctor. CAUTION: ⢠Do not recharge, disassemble, heat or dis- pose of the battery in a fire. ⢠Use a CR2032 (3 V) lithium battery only. Never use other types of battery with this unit. ⢠Do not handle the battery with metallic tools. ⢠Do not store the lithium battery with metallic materials. ⢠When disposing of used batteries, please comply with governmental regulations or environmental public institutionâÂÂs rules that apply in your country/area. ⢠Always check carefully that you are loading the battery with its ( ) and (âÂÂ) poles facing in the proper directions.
11 Before Using This Product U sing the steering remote con- troller Precaution: ⢠Do not operate this unit while manipulating the steering wheel as this might result in a traffic acci- dent. ⢠If you have to operate this unit unavoidably when driving, pay careful attention to the road ahead to avoid the risk of being involved in a traffic accident. ⢠If any of the following problems occur, immediately stop using this unit and consult with the dealer from whom you purchased it: â the unit is smoking. â the unit is emitting an abnormal odor. â a foreign object has entered the unit. â liquid has been spilled on or into the unit. If you continue to use this unit without rectifying the problem, the unit may be damaged badly, resulting in a serious accident or fire. ⢠Do not leave this unit free (unattached) inside the car. When the car stops or turns a curve, the unit might drop on the floor. If the unit rolls under the brake pedal, it might prevent the driver from brak- ing properly, causing serious trouble. Be sure to fix this unit to the steering wheel. ⢠Do not disassemble or modify this unit. To do so may cause a malfunction. ⢠When VOLUME extends outward, the remote con- trol may not work properly. FUNCTION button and AUDIO button Operation of the FUNCTION button and the AUDIO button on the remote controller differs from the operation of the FUNC button and the AUDIO button on the head unit. When operat- ing the head unit, use the FUNC button and the AUDIO button to select the appropriate menu, then use the multi-function buttons to select the mode. When operating the remote controller, however, switch through the modes as described below to select the mode. FUNCTION button operation ⢠Press FUNCTION to select the desired mode (e.g., built-in CD player). Press FUNCTION repeatedly to switch between the following modes: RPT = RDM = SCAN = T.LIST = PAUSE = TTLin Note: ⢠Refer to âÂÂBuilt-in CD player function menuâ on page 20. AUDIO button operation ⢠Press AUDIO to select the desired mode. Press AUDIO repeatedly to switch between the following modes: F/B = LOUD = SFC = EQ1 = EQ2 = ASL = POSI = T.AL1 = T.AL2 = SW1 = SW2 = HPF F = HPF R = SLA = A.EQ = D.ATT Note: ⢠Refer to âÂÂAudio menuâ on page 56.
D isplaying and setting the clock You can turn the time display on or off and set the time. Setting the time display on or off 1. Press NEXT to display âÂÂCLKâÂÂ. Press NEXT until âÂÂCLKâ appears. 2. Press CLK and then press ON/OFF to turn the time display on. The light illuminates. When the time display is turned on, âÂÂTIMEâÂÂ, âÂÂDATEâ and âÂÂJUSTâ appear simultaneously. ⢠Press ON/OFF again to turn the time dis- play off. ⢠If you press BAND and exit the calendar and time mode, the time display will appear instead of the source name. Note: ⢠If you do not operate the function within about 60 seconds, the display is automatically returned. Off clock display When the time display is turned on, the calen- dar display appears with the time display when sources and the feature demo are off. Setting the date The calender display adjusted in this mode appears only when sources and the feature demo are off. 1. Press NEXT to display âÂÂCLKâÂÂ. Press NEXT until âÂÂCLKâ appears. 2. Press CLK and then press DATE to set the date. 3. Press 2 2 or 3 3 to switch between day, month and year. 4. Press 5 5 or â â to correct the date. Pressing 5 advances the day, month or year. Pressing â turns back the day, month or year. Setting the time 1. Press NEXT to display âÂÂCLKâÂÂ. Press NEXT until âÂÂCLKâ appears. 2. Press CLK and then press TIME to set the time. 3. Press 2 2 or 3 3 to switch between hour and minute. 4. Press 5 5 or â â to adjust the time. Pressing 5 advances the hour or minute. Pressing â turns back the hour or minute. Matching the time to a time signal 1. Press NEXT to display âÂÂCLKâÂÂ. Press NEXT until âÂÂCLKâ appears. 2. Press CLK and then press JUST to match the time to a time signal. ⢠If the minute is âÂÂ00â â âÂÂ29âÂÂ, the minutes are rounded down. (e.g., âÂÂ10:18â becomes âÂÂ10:00âÂÂ.) ⢠If the minute is âÂÂ30â â âÂÂ59âÂÂ, the minutes are rounded up. (e.g., âÂÂ10:36â becomes âÂÂ11:00âÂÂ.) Note: ⢠During date adjustment, âÂÂJUSTâ is not displayed. Time display 12 ENGLISH ESPAÃÂOL DEUTSCH FRANÃÂAIS ITALIANO NEDERLANDS
13 Before Using This Product D etaching and replacing the front panel W ARNING: ⢠Do not use with the front panel left open. If the front panel is left open, it may result in injury in the event of an accident. ⢠Do not drive with the front panel removed. If the front panel is left removed, it may result in injury in the event of an accident. Theft protection The front panel of the head unit is detachable to discourage theft. Precaution: ⢠Never use force or grip the display tightly when removing or replacing the front panel. ⢠Avoid subjecting the front panel to excessive shocks. ⢠Keep the front panel out of direct sunlight and high temperatures. Detaching the front panel 1. Press OPEN to open the front panel. 2. Slide the front panel toward you and remove it. Take care not to grip the front panel tightly or drop it. ⢠Never remove the front panel while the access lamp is lit, as otherwise data may be destroyed. (See page 39.) 3. Close the inner cover. 4. Use the protective case provided to store/carry the detached front panel. Replacing the front panel 1. Make sure the inner cover is closed. 2. Replace the front panel by clipping it into place. W arning tone If the front panel is not detached within five sec- onds after the ignition is turned off, the warning tone will sound to remind you to detach the front panel. Note: ⢠You can cancel the warning tone function. (Refer to page 66.) Release section
Basic Operation T urning a source on or off You can select the source you want to listen to. To switch to built-in CD player, load a CD in this product. (See page 19.) To switch to a âÂÂMemory Stickâ player, load a âÂÂMemory Stickâ in this product. (See page 39.) 1. Press SOURCE to select the desired source (e.g., tuner). Press SOURCE repeatedly to switch between the following sources: Built-in CD player (MP3) = TV tuner = Tuner = DAB tuner = Music server = âÂÂMemory Stickâ player = Multi-CD player = External unit 1 = External unit 2 = AUX 2. Press VOLUME to extend the VOLUME outward. ⢠When you press VOLUME, it extends out- ward so that it becomes easier to turn. To retract VOLUME, press it again. 3. Turn VOLUME to adjust the volume. 4. Press and hold SOURCE to turn the source off. Note: ⢠External unit refers to a Pioneer product (such as one available in the future) that, although incompat- ible as a source, enables control of basic functions by this product. Two external units can be con- trolled by this product, although âÂÂExternalâ is dis- played whether you select external unit 1 or external unit 2. When two external units are connected, the allocation of them to external unit 1 or external unit 2 is automatically set by this product. ⢠In the following cases, the sound source will not change: * When no product corresponding to the source is connected to this product. * No disc is set in this product. * No âÂÂMemory Stickâ is set in this product. * No magazine is set in the multi-CD player. * AUX (auxiliary setting) is set to off. (Refer to page 64.) ⢠When this productâÂÂs blue/white lead is connected to the carâÂÂs auto-antenna relay control terminal, the carâÂÂs auto-antenna extends when this productâÂÂs source is switched on. To retract the antenna, switch the source off. S OFT KEY operation SOFT KEY operation means that the function of a button changes as indicated on the display. The multi-function buttons provide SOFT KEY operation; the functions performed by the but- tons change according to the function or setting that has been selected. The explanations given in this manual are based on FORM 1 display. If you have selected FORM 2, the functions of some of the multi- function buttons may be different from those indicated in the manual. Important In this manual, for operations using the multi- function buttons the function displayed is used as the name of the function button. Multi-function buttons Function names â 3 â 14 ENGLISH ESPAÃÂOL DEUTSCH FRANÃÂAIS ITALIANO NEDERLANDS
15 Basic Operation Switching the function of the multi-func- tion buttons The â 3â indicator shows that the multi-function buttons have functions other than those current- ly displayed. When this indicator is visible, press NEXT to switch through the functions of the multi-function buttons. ⢠Press NEXT to display the desired func- tions (e.g., built-in CD player). Press NEXT repeatedly to switch between the following functions: ë Note: ⢠The number of functions or displays switched through will differ according to the source or menu selected. ⢠When no function is indicated for a button, that but- ton is not currently active. Example of multi-function button opera- tion Here the âÂÂrandom playâ function of the built-in CD player is used as an example to illustrate operation of the multi-function buttons. 1. Press NEXT to display âÂÂFUNCâÂÂ. Press NEXT repeatedly until âÂÂFUNCâ appears. 2. Press FUNC to enter the function menu. With the switch to the function menu, the functions of the multi-function buttons also change simultaneously. 3. Press RDM to select the random mode. 4. Press RDM to turn random play on. ⢠Press RDM again to turn random play off. The light goes off. 5. Press BACK to exit the function menu. When the function menu is exited, the func- tions of the multi-function buttons also change simultaneously. Note: ⢠You can also turn random play on or off by pressing 5 or â in the random mode. ⢠If you do not operate the function within about 30 seconds, the display is automatically returned. The difference between the BAND button and the BACK button BAND button Pressing the BAND button immediately cancels the current menu or mode, and returns to the basic displays. Note: ⢠When the source is the Tuner, TV tuner or DAB tuner and no menu or mode is selected, pressing the BAND button has the effect of switching bands. BACK button Pressing the BACK button cancels the current menu or mode and returns to the previously selected menu or mode. The light illuminates.
16 ENGLISH ESPAÃÂOL DEUTSCH FRANÃÂAIS ITALIANO NEDERLANDS Display example (e.g., built-in CD player) K ey guidance indicator This productâÂÂs display features key guidance indicators. These light to indicate which of the 5 /â /2 /3 buttons you can use. When youâÂÂre in the function menu, audio menu or the other menus, they also make it easy to see which 5 /â /2 /3 buttons you can use to switch func- tions on/off, switch repeat selections and per- form other operations. Note: ⢠In this manual, operation for each mode is given mainly in terms of the multi-function buttons. However, in each mode, when the key guidance indicators are lit it is also possible to use 5 /â /2 /3 to operate the mode. Key guidance indicators
17 T uner D isplay and indicators FORM 1 FORM 2 q Band w LOC indicator e Preset number r Frequency t Stereo indicator B asic operation 1. Press SOURCE to select the tuner. Press SOURCE until âÂÂTunerâ appears. 2. Press VOLUME to extend the VOLUME outward. ⢠When you press VOLUME, it extends out- ward so that it becomes easier to turn. To retract VOLUME, press it again. 3. Turn VOLUME to adjust the volume. 4. Press BAND to select the desired band. Press BAND repeatedly to switch between the following bands: FM-1 = FM-2 = FM-3 = AM 5. Press 2 2 or 3 3 to tune in to a station. The frequencies move up or down step by step. ⢠If you press and hold 2 or 3 for about one second and release, you can perform seek tuning. Seek tuning lets you skip broad- casting stations until a broadcast strong enough for good reception is found. ⢠If you press and hold 2 or 3, you can skip broadcasting stations. Seek tuning starts as soon as you release the button. Note: ⢠The stereo indicator â â lights when a stereo sta- tion is selected. S toring and recalling broadcast stations If you press any of the buttons 1 â 6, you can easily store up to six broadcast stations for later recall. Storing broadcast stations 1. Press NEXT to display âÂÂ1â â âÂÂ6âÂÂ. Press NEXT until âÂÂ1â â âÂÂ6â appears. 2. When you find a station that you want to store in memory, press and hold any of the buttons 1 â 6 until the preset number stops flashing. The station is stored in memory under the selected button. Note: ⢠Up to 18 FM stations, six for each of the three FM bands, and six AM stations can be stored in memo- ry. r qe w t rt qw e
18 ENGLISH ESPAÃÂOL DEUTSCH FRANÃÂAIS ITALIANO NEDERLANDS Recalling broadcast stations 1. Press NEXT to display âÂÂ1â â âÂÂ6âÂÂ. Press NEXT until âÂÂ1â â âÂÂ6â appears. 2. Press any of the buttons 1 â 6 to recall a station preset under that button. Note: ⢠You can also use 5 or â to recall broadcast sta- tions memorized in the buttons 1 â 6. T uner function menu The tuner function menu has the following func- tions: Note: ⢠If you do not operate the function within about 30 seconds, the display is automatically returned. S toring the strongest broadcast stations BSM (best stations memory) lets you automati- cally store the six strongest broadcast stations under the buttons 1 â 6. 1. Press FUNC to select the BSM mode. 2. Press BSM to turn the BSM on. âÂÂSearchingâ appears. The six strongest broadcast stations will be stored under the buttons 1 â 6 and in order of their signal strength. When finished, âÂÂSearchingâ disappears and the display switches to the preset channel list mode. ⢠To cancel the storage process before it is completed, press BSM again while âÂÂSearchingâ appears. 3. Press any of the buttons 1 â 6 to recall the desired station. S electing stations from the pre- set channel list The preset channel list lets you see the list of preset stations and select one of them to receive. 1. Press FUNC and then press chLIST to select the preset channel list mode. 2. Press any of the buttons 1 â 6 to recall the desired station. Note: ⢠You can also use 2, 3 and 5 to select and recall the desired station. T uning in strong signals Local seek tuning lets you tune in only those broadcast stations with sufficiently strong sig- nals for good reception. 1. Press FUNC and then press LOC to select the local mode. 2. Press LOC to set the local seek sensitivi- ty. Press LOC repeatedly to switch between the following settings: FM: Local OFF = Level 1 = Level 2 = Level 3 = Level 4 AM: Local OFF = Level 1 = Level 2 ⢠When the local mode is exited except for âÂÂLocal OFFâ is selected, âÂÂLOCâ appears on the basic display. Note: ⢠The âÂÂLevel 4â setting allows reception of only the strongest stations, while lower settings let you receive progressively weaker stations.
19 Built-in CD Player D isplay and indicators FORM 1 FORM 2 q Source name w Track number e Disc title r Play time t Track title B asic operation The built-in CD player plays one standard 12 cm or 8 cm (single) CD at a time. Do not use an adapter when playing an 8 cm CD. 1. Press OPEN to open the front panel. 2. Insert a CD into the CD loading slot. 3. Close the front panel. 4. Press VOLUME to extend the VOLUME outward. ⢠When you press VOLUME, it extends out- ward so that it becomes easier to turn. To retract VOLUME, press it again. 5. Turn VOLUME to adjust the volume. 6. Press 2 2 or 3 3 to select a track. Pressing 3 skips to the start of the next track. Pressing 2 once skips to the start of the cur- rent track. Pressing again will skip to the previous track. ⢠If you press and hold 2 or 3, you can per- form fast forward or reverse. 7. Press OPEN and then press CD EJECT to eject the CD. ⢠Be sure to close the front panel after removing the CD. W ARNING: ⢠Do not use with the front panel left open. If the front panel is left open, it may result in injury in the event of an accident. Note: ⢠You can select CD as the source by pressing SOURCE when a disc is loaded in this product. ⢠When the front panel is open, multi-function but- tons are not available. ⢠Do not insert anything other than a CD into the CD loading slot. ⢠A CD left partially inserted after ejection may incur damage or fall out. ⢠If a CD cannot be inserted fully or playback fails, make sure the recorded side is down. Press the CD EJECT and check the disc for damage before rein- serting it. ⢠If the built-in CD player cannot operate properly, an error message (such as âÂÂERROR-12âÂÂ) appears on the display. Refer to âÂÂUnderstanding built-in CD player error messagesâ on page 74. CD EJECT button CD loading slot et qw r er qw
S witching and scrolling the title When playing a CD TEXT disc, you can switch text display such as artist name and track title. With text longer than 32 letters, you can scroll to see the rest of the text. 1. Press TITLE to switch the title mode. 2. Press the corresponding button to dis- play the desired title. FORM 1 Button Operation D.TTL Displays disc title. D.ART Displays disc artist name. T.TTL Displays track title. T.ART Displays track artist name. THNDR Displays thunderbolt animation. SCROLL Scrolls the displayed title. FORM 2 Button Operation TTL1 Displays disc title and track title. TTL2 Displays disc title and disc artist name. TTL3 Displays track title and track artist name. SCROLL Scrolls the displayed title. Note: ⢠If you do not operate the function within about eight seconds, the display is automatically returned. ⢠You cannot use 2 or 3 to select a track in title mode. ⢠When you select the display form 2, the titles are displayed up to 24 letters long. ⢠A CD TEXT disc is a CD featuring recorded text information such as disc title, artist name and track title. ⢠If certain text information is not recorded on a CD TEXT disc, âÂÂNo ~â (e.g., âÂÂNo titleâÂÂ) is displayed. ⢠If you have not input disc titles, âÂÂNo titleâ is dis- played. B uilt-in CD player function menu The built-in CD player function menu has the following functions: Note: ⢠If you do not operate the function within about 30 seconds, the display is automatically returned. (When you select the disc title input mode (TTLin), the display is not returned automatically.) ⢠âÂÂT.LISTâ is displayed only when playing a CD TEXT disc. R epeating play Repeat play lets you hear the same track over again. 1. Press FUNC to select the repeat mode. 2. Press RPT to turn the repeat play on. The light illuminates. The track currently playing will play and then repeat. ⢠Press RPT again to turn repeat play off. ⢠When the repeat mode is exited while repeat play is on, âÂÂT.RPTâ appears on the basic display. Note: ⢠If you perform track search or fast forward/reverse, repeat play is automatically canceled. 20 ENGLISH ESPAÃÂOL DEUTSCH FRANÃÂAIS ITALIANO NEDERLANDS
21 Built-in CD Player P laying tracks in random order Random play lets you play back tracks on the CD in random order. 1. Press FUNC and then press RDM to select the random mode. 2. Press RDM to turn random play on. The light illuminates. Tracks will play in ran- dom order. ⢠Press RDM again to turn random play off. ⢠When the random mode is exited while random play is on, âÂÂRDMâ appears on the basic display. S canning tracks of a CD Scan play lets you hear the first 10 seconds of each track on the CD. 1. Press FUNC and then press SCAN to select the scan mode. 2. Press SCAN to turn scan play on. The light illuminates. The first 10 seconds of each track are played. ⢠When the scan mode is exited while scan play is on, âÂÂSCANâ appears on the basic display. 3. When you find the desired track, press SCAN to turn scan play off. The light goes off. The track will continue to play. ⢠If the scan mode is automatically canceled, select the scan mode again. Note: ⢠After scanning of a CD is finished, normal playback of the tracks will begin again. S electing tracks from the track title list The track title list lets you see the list of track titles on a CD TEXT disc and select one of them for playback. 1. Press FUNC and then press T.LIST to select the track title list mode. 2. Press NEXT to display the desired track title. Press NEXT until the desired track title appears. 3. Press the corresponding number button to select the desired track title. That selection will begin to play. Note: ⢠You can also use 2, 3 and 5 to select and play the desired track title. ⢠Only when playing a CD TEXT disc, you can switch to this mode.
P ausing CD playback Pause lets you temporarily stop playback of the CD. 1. Press FUNC and then press PAUSE to select the pause mode. 2. Press PAUSE to turn the pause on. The light illuminates. Play of the current track pauses. ⢠Press PAUSE again to turn the pause off. ⢠When the pause mode is exited while pause is on, âÂÂPAUSEâ is displayed in the basic display. Note: ⢠You can also turn pause on or off by pressing PAUSE in the following display. E ntering disc titles Disc title input lets you input up to 48 CD titles up to 10 letters long into the built-in CD player. If you input a CD title, the entered title is dis- played. For details of operation, refer to âÂÂEntering disc titlesâ on page 46 under âÂÂMulti-CD PlayerâÂÂ. Note: ⢠When playing a CD TEXT disc, if you switch to this mode, âÂÂNo title inputâ is displayed and you cannot input the title. ⢠After the titles for 48 discs have been entered, the data for a new disc will overwrite the oldest one. ⢠If you connect a multi-CD player, you can input disc titles for up to 100 discs. ⢠When a multi-CD player that does not support disc title functions is connected, you cannot enter disc titles in this product. 22 ENGLISH ESPAÃÂOL DEUTSCH FRANÃÂAIS ITALIANO NEDERLANDS
23 MP3 Play D isplay and indicators FORM 1 FORM 2 q Source name w MP3 indicator e Bit rate indicator r Track number t Folder name y Play time u File name B asic operation The built-in CD player can playback MP3 files recorded on CD-ROM discs. (See page 71.) 1. Press OPEN to open the front panel. 2. Insert a CD-ROM into the CD loading slot. 3. Close the front panel. 4. Press VOLUME to extend the VOLUME outward. ⢠When you press VOLUME, it extends out- ward so that it becomes easier to trun. To retract VOLUME, press it again. 5. Turn VOLUME to adjust the volume. 6. Press 5 or â to select a folder. ⢠You can not select a folder in which no MP3 file is recorded. 7. Press 2 2 or 3 3 to select a track. Pressing 3 skips to the start of the next track. Pressing 2 once skips to the start of the cur- rent track. Pressing again will skip to the previous track. ⢠If you press and hold 2 or 3, you can per- form fast forward or reverse. 8. Press OPEN and then press CD EJECT to eject the CD-ROM. ⢠Be sure to close the front panel after removing the CD-ROM. W ARNING: ⢠Do not use with the front panel left open. If the front panel is left open, it may result in injury in the event of an accident. Note: ⢠You can select MP3 as the source by pressing SOURCE when a CD-ROM is loaded in this product. ⢠When the front panel is open, multi-function but- tons are not available. ⢠Do not insert anything other than a CD into the CD loading slot. ⢠A CD left partially inserted after ejection may incur damage or fall out. ⢠If a CD-ROM cannot be inserted fully or playback fails, make sure the recorded side is down. Press the CD EJECT and check the disc for damage before reinserting it. ⢠If the built-in CD player cannot operate properly, an error message (such as âÂÂERROR-12âÂÂ) appears on the display. Refer to âÂÂUnderstanding built-in CD player error messagesâ on page 74. CD EJECT button CD loading slot tu qr w y ty qw e r
S witching and scrolling the title You can switch text display such as artist name and track title. With text longer than 32 letters, you can scroll to see the rest of the text. 1. Press TITLE to switch the title mode. 2. Press the corresponding button to dis- play the desired title. FORM 1 Button Operation FOLDER Displays folder name. FILE Displays file name. D.TTL Displays disc title. T.TTL Displays track title. ARTIST Displays track artist name. SCROLL Scrolls the displayed title. FORM 2 Button Operation F FIL Displays folder name and file name FIL T Displays file name and track title. D TRK Displays disc title and track title. TR ART Displays track title and track artist name. SCROLL Scrolls the displayed title. Note: ⢠If you do not operate the function within about eight seconds, the display is automatically returned. ⢠You cannot use 2 or 3 to select a track in title mode. ⢠When you select the display form 2, the titles are displayed up to 24 letters long. ⢠This product conforms to ISO9660 level 1 and level 2 standards. Correspondence to extended format is made with the following conditions. Joliet: Correspondence only to the 8.3 format. Romeo:Correspondence to folder names with up to 64 characters and file names with up to 63 characters (including the extension). (See page 79.) ⢠Only the titles entered with the ID3 tag will be dis- played for the disc title, the track title, and the artist name. ⢠If certain text information is not recorded on a MP3 file, âÂÂNo ~â (e.g., âÂÂNo titleâÂÂ) is displayed. MP3 function menu The MP3 function menu has the following func- tions: Note: ⢠If you do not operate the function within about 30 seconds, the display is automatically returned. (When you select the disc title input mode (TTLin), the display is not returned automatically.) ⢠When playing a CD-ROM disc, if you switch to the disc title input mode (TTLin), âÂÂNo title inputâ is dis- played and you cannot input the title. R epeating play When playing back MP3 files, there are three repeat play ranges: one-track repeat, folder repeat and disc repeat. 1. Press FUNC to select the repeat mode. 2. Press RPT to select the repeat range. Press RPT repeatedly to switch between the following repeat ranges: Track repeat (one-track repeat) = Folder repeat (folder repeat) = Disc repeat (disc repeat) ⢠When the repeat mode is exited, either âÂÂT.RPTâ or âÂÂFOLDERRPTâ may appear on the basic display. â âÂÂT.RPTâ appears while the one-track repeat is selected. â âÂÂFOLDERRPTâ appears while the folder repeat is selected. Continued overleaf. 24 ENGLISH ESPAÃÂOL DEUTSCH FRANÃÂAIS ITALIANO NEDERLANDS
25 MP3 Play Note: ⢠If you select other folders during repeat play, the repeat range changes to disc repeat. ⢠If you perform track search or fast forward/reverse during one-track repeat, the repeat range changes to folder repeat. ⢠Folder repeat plays back the tracks (MP3 files) in the current folder only. Tracks in sub-folders are not played back. P laying tracks in random order Random play lets you play back tracks in the current folder in random order. 1. Press FUNC and then press RDM to select the random mode. 2. Press RDM to turn random play on. The light illuminates. Tracks will play in ran- dom order. ⢠Press RDM again to turn random play off. ⢠When the random mode is exited while random play is on, âÂÂRDMâ appears on the basic display. Note: ⢠Random play plays back the tracks (MP3 files) in the current folder only. Tracks in sub-folders are not played back. ⢠When you select disc repeat, when random play of all tracks in the current folder has been completed, random play will continue on the next folder. S canning folders and tracks When you select folder repeat, scan play lets you hear the first 10 seconds of each track in the selected folder. When you select disc repeat, scan play lets you hear the first 10 sec- onds of the first track on each folder. 1. Select the repeat range. Refer to âÂÂRepeating playâ on page 24. 2. Press FUNC and then press SCAN to select the scan mode. 3. Press SCAN to turn scan play on. The light illuminates. The first 10 seconds of each track of the current folder (or the first track of each folder) are played. ⢠When the scan mode is exited while scan play is on, âÂÂSCANâ appears on the basic display. 4. When you find the desired track (or fold- er), press SCAN to turn scan play off. The light goes off. The track (or folder) will continue to play. ⢠If the scan mode is automatically canceled, select the scan mode again. Note: ⢠After track or folder scanning is finished, normal playback of the tracks will begin again. ⢠If you turn scan play on during one-track repeat, the repeat range changes to folder repeat.
S electing tracks from the track title list The track title list lets you see the list of track (or folder) titles on a CD-ROM disc and select one of them for playback. 1. Press FUNC and then press T.LIST to select the track title list mode. 2. Press NEXT to display the desired track (or folder) title. Press NEXT until the desired track (or fold- er) title appears. 3. Press the corresponding number button to select the desired track (or folder) title. That selection will begin to play. ⢠When you have selected a folder, a list of the titles of the tracks (or folder) in it can be viewed. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to select the desired track title. Note: ⢠You can also use 2, 3 and 5 to select and play the desired track title. ⢠By pressing âÂÂ, you can return to the previous list (the folder one level higher). ⢠The track title is displayed as the file name of the MP3 file. (It is not displayed as the track title in the ID3 tag.) ⢠At the time of playback of an MP3 file, the track title list always is displayed from âÂÂROOTâÂÂ. ⢠Folders containing only MP3 files which can not be played and folders containing no MP3 files also are displayed in the list. P ausing MP3 playback Pause lets you temporarily stop playback of the MP3. 1. Press FUNC and then press PAUSE to select the pause mode. 2. Press PAUSE to turn the pause on. The light illuminates. Play of the current track pauses. ⢠Press PAUSE again to turn the pause off. ⢠When the pause mode is exited while pause is on, âÂÂPAUSEâ is displayed in the basic display. Note: ⢠You can also turn pause on or off by pressing PAUSE in the following display. 26 ENGLISH ESPAÃÂOL DEUTSCH FRANÃÂAIS ITALIANO NEDERLANDS
27 Music Ser ver Recording D isplay and indicators During record standby During recording q Recording source name w CD track number e Recording range indicator r CD information t Recording bit rate indicator y Remaining recordable time u Music server track number i Recording display Note: ⢠The remaining recordable time is calculated based on the bit rate currently selected. B efore recording ⢠Even when the remaining recordable time of the music server is displayed as âÂÂ00H00MâÂÂ, recording is possible until âÂÂM.Server fullâ is displayed. ⢠If the time remaining is shorter than the total time of CD or tracks to be recorded, âÂÂTime shortâ is displayed, allowing recording for only remaining time of the music server. ⢠Recordings are in stereo; mono recordings are not possible. ⢠When recording CD TEXT discs, the charac- ter information stored on the CD TEXT disc can not be recorded on the music server. ⢠You may erase recordings. (See page 37.) ⢠Recording standby is cancelled in the follow- ing cases: * When the power is switched off. * On ignition of the car engine. * When the recording source is changed. * When BAND is pressed. * When a CD is inserted into the built-in CD player during recording from other device. * When a record source device is disconnect- ed (such as during Muti-CD recording.) ⢠Recording is cancelled in the following cases: * On ignition of the car engine. * When REC is pressed. * When a record source device is disconnect- ed (such as during Muti-CD recording.) * When there is an error message from the music server or built-in CD player. (See pages 74 to 76.) * When a skip has been repeated 3 times at the same position during recording from the built-in CD player. ⢠Track skip function is disabled during record standby or recording. Unnecessary tracks can be erased after recording. PRECAUTION: ⢠Please may test recordings of recordings that can not be taken again. ⢠We cannot accept liability for data not record- ed or lost due to the failure, improper opera- tion or malfunction of this product. ⢠The use of recordings for purposes other than personal enjoyment, etc. are not permitted if they infringe copyrights and the rights of copy- right claimants without prior consent. ⢠This product is not intended for recording from radio. rt y u qw i e rt y u qw e
Digital and analog recording This product is intended for digital recording from the built-in CD player to the music server. Recording from sources other than the built-in CD, such as multi-CD or AUX, will be recorded in analog. While digital recordings can be made with less loss of quality, we recommend record- ing from the built-in CD. ⢠It is not possible to digitally copy music to the music server if it was digitally recorded from CDs (such as CD-R). This is set by SCMS, the Serial Copying Management System, which has been devel- oped to prevent serial copies (copies of copies). (See page 80.) ⢠Analog recordings are stopped automatically after two hours. To continue recording to the same playlist file, press REC and restart the recording. Bit rate The bit rate can be selected for each recording. This alters the sound quality and recording time. (See page 30.) Recording range The range of recording from the built-in CD or multi-CD player is selectable. (See page 30.) R ecording from the built-in CD Recording from CD-ROM is not possible. Not all recordings may be made from CD-R, CD-RW and other formats for reasons of copyright pro- tection. (SCMS) (See page 80.) 1. Press OPEN to open the front panel. 2. Insert a CD into the CD loading slot. 3. Close the front panel. 4. Press and hold REC until you have the record standby status. âÂÂReadyâ and âÂÂM.Server pauseâ appear in sequence and the product goes into the record standby status. 5. Press FUNC to select the record mode setting mode. 6. Press R.MODE to select the recording range. Press R.MODE repeatedly to switch between the following ranges: Disc (disc recording) = Track (one-track recording) ⢠Disc (disc recording) will record the disc you are listening to from the current track to the end of the disc. When disc recording has been interrupted, continued recording from the interrupted track is possible. (Refer to âÂÂSelecting the recording rangeâ on page 30.) ⢠With Track (one-track recording), you can only record the track you are currently lis- tening to. 7. Press BAND to cancel the record mode setting mode. 8. Press 2 2 or 3 3 to select the desired track. 9. Press REC to start the recording. Recording starts automatically from the beginning of the track being listened to. ⢠When the recording ends, âÂÂM.Server pauseâ is displayed and the product goes into the record standby status. 10. Press BAND to cancel the record standby status. Continued overleaf. CD EJECT button CD loading slot 28 ENGLISH ESPAÃÂOL DEUTSCH FRANÃÂAIS ITALIANO NEDERLANDS
29 Music Ser ver Recording Note: ⢠If REC is pressed during recording, recording is ter- minated. ⢠In the event of skipping, the recording will revert to the beginning of the track (retry function). ⢠On record standby, the current track is repeated. This is cancelled when recording begins. ⢠Even if the random, track scan and pause are set to on, the current track is repeated when the mode is switched to the record standby status. When the recording is started, the repeat play is canceled. ⢠Fast forward and fast reverse do not operate when the product is on record standby. S witching CD information When recording from the built-in CD, you can switch CD information during record standby or recording. ⢠Press DISP to change the CD information display. Press DISP repeatedly to switch between the following displays: Recording range âÂÂDiscâ and âÂÂContinueâ Play time = remaining disc time = total disc time Recording range âÂÂTrackâ Play time = remaining track time = total track time R ecording from a source other than the built-in CD This product can make analog recordings from other equipment. 1. Press SOURCE to select the desired source. Press SOURCE until the desired source appears. 2. Press and hold REC until you have the record standby status. âÂÂReadyâ and âÂÂM.Server pauseâ appear in sequence and the product goes into the record standby status. ⢠When performing multi-CD recording, you can set the recording mode (refer to âÂÂSelecting the recording rangeâ on page 30) and the bit rate (refer to âÂÂSelecting the recording qualityâ on page 30). ⢠When recording from a source other than the multi-CD (such as a TV tuner or AUX output, etc.), the bit rate should be set only as specified (refer to âÂÂSelecting the record- ing qualityâ on page 30.) 3. Press REC to start recording. Recording begins as soon as REC is pressed. ⢠When performing multi-CD recording, press 2 or 3 right before pressing REC to select the track. 4. Press REC again to stop the recording. âÂÂReadyâ and âÂÂM.Server pauseâ appear in sequence and the product goes into the record standby status. 5. Press BAND to cancel the record standby status. Note: ⢠If the CD sound from the source CD falls below a certain level, a track number will be added automat- ically. By pressing 5 during recording, it is possible to add a track number manually (up to 400). ⢠Depending on the recording source CD, the unit may determine a track ends in the middle or may not be able to determine the end of a track. ⢠If the CD skips during recording, it will be recorded as is. ⢠When recording where there is a lot of vibration, such as on the road, track numbers will be added automatically. R ecording function menu The recording function menu has the following functions: Note: ⢠If you do not operate the function within about 30 seconds, the display is automatically returned. ⢠The record mode setting mode (R.MODE) is dis- played for settings only for CD recording.
S electing the recording range It is possible to select the recording range when recording from a CD. 1. In record standby, press FUNC to select the recording mode setting mode. 2. Press R.MODE to select the recording range. Press R.MODE repeatedly to switch between the following recording ranges: Built-in CD recording Disc (disc recording) = (Continue (continu- ous recording)) = Track (one-track recording) ⢠Disc (disc recording) will record the disc you are listening to from the current track to the end of the disc. ⢠Continue (continuous recording) continues recording from the interrupted disc record- ing to the last track of the CD. (Even when a track other than the interrupted one is selected, recording will be performed from the interrupted track.) ⢠With Track (one-track recording), you can only record the track you are currently lis- tening to. Note: ⢠When Disc (disc recording) has been interrupted, and record standby is performed again, Continue (continuous recording) will be performed, except in the following cases. * In case of interruption because of an error. * When the CD has been removed after the interrup- tion. * In case of recording with âÂÂTrackâ after the inter- ruption. * When the interruption has been caused by discon- necting the yellow lead ( Battery) of this product. ⢠With Disc (disc recording), you cannot select and record only the track to be recorded. Unwanted tracks can be deleted from the music server after recording. (See page 37.) Multi-CD Recording All (all tracks recording) = Track (one-track recording) ⢠With Track (one-track recording), you can only record the track you are currently lis- tening to (not from the beginning of the track). ⢠On All (all tracks recording) you can record all tracks from the one you are listening to until you stop recording. (No rewind to the beginning of track or disc.) S electing the recording quality When recording it is possible to select the sound quality. The larger the recording bit rate number, the higher the sound quality, although the total recording time will be shorter. 1. In record standby, press FUNC and then press RATE to select the recording bit rate mode. 2. Press RATE to select the recording bit rate. Press RATE repeatedly to switch between the following setting: 132 kbps = 105 kbps Note: ⢠The bit rate allows digital and analog recordings to be recorded in separate settings. (There is no need to change the setting when you wish to keep the bit rate previously set.) 30 ENGLISH ESPAÃÂOL DEUTSCH FRANÃÂAIS ITALIANO NEDERLANDS
31 Music Ser ver Play D isplay and indicators FORM 1 FORM 2 q Source name w Bit rate indicator e Track number r Playlist file name t Play time y Track title B asic operation It is possible to play back tracks recorded on the music server. 1. Press SOURCE to select the music serv- er. Press SOURCE until âÂÂMusic Serverâ appears. 2. Press VOLUME to extend the VOLUME outward. ⢠When you press VOLUME, it extends out- ward so that it becomes easier to turn. To retract VOLUME, press it again. 3. Turn VOLUME to adjust the volume. 4. Press 5 5 or â â to select a playlist file. 5. Press 2 2 or 3 3 to select a track. Pressing 3 skips to the start of the next track. Pressing 2 once skips to the start of the cur- rent track. Pressing again will skip to the previous track. ⢠If you press and hold 2 or 3, you can per- form fast forward or reverse. Note: ⢠If no music is recorded on the music server, âÂÂNo audioâ is displayed. ⢠If the music server cannot operate properly, an error message such as âÂÂERROR-30â is displayed. Refer to âÂÂUnderstanding music server error mes- sagesâ on page 75. ⢠When ACC ON/OFF is performed during internal processing, âÂÂProcessingâ may be displayed. In this case, please wait until the display goes out. S electing the playlist mode The playlist mode uses playlist files that group tracks according to the recording conditions at the time of recording. The mode allows you to play back only desired groups of tracks. 1. Press BAND to select the desired playlist mode. Press BAND repeatedly to switch between the following modes: All (each recording date) = Digital (digital recordings) = Analog (analog recordings) = Artist (artist) = Custom (custom) Note: ⢠If you switch to playlist mode when nothing has been recorded, âÂÂNo PlayListâ or âÂÂNo audioâ is dis- played. ry qe t rt qw e
Playlist files Playlist files are lists of information on groups of tracks, containing such details as recording date, digital/analog and location. For every track, the playlist will contain the date of record- ing, whether it is digital, and the artistâÂÂs name, etc. (Music data is stored only in the playlist file for each recording date.) ⢠Playlist files for each recording date store tracks and the information on each track respectively. ⢠In playlist files for digital recordings, the infor- mation for each track is stored separately. (When the recording range is âÂÂDiscâ or âÂÂContinueâÂÂ, the entire list becomes one playlist file, and when the recording range is âÂÂTrackâÂÂ, the range from the start of recording to the end becomes one playlist file.) ⢠In playlist files for analog recordings, the infor- mation for each track is stored separately. ⢠Artist playlist files store track information by artist, if there is an artistâÂÂs name in the data- base when making digital recordings. ⢠Custom playlist files can be created contain- ing favorite tracks. U sing the custom playlist mode The custom playlist mode allows you to create playlist files to record and play back your favorite tracks. You can create six custom playlist files. Recording tracks in a custom playlist file 1. Press NEXT to display âÂÂCSTM1â â âÂÂCSTM6âÂÂ. Press NEXT until âÂÂCSTM1â â âÂÂCSTM6â appears. 2. When you find a track that you want to store in a custom playlist file, press and hold any of the buttons CSTM1 â CSTM6 until âÂÂFinished recordingâ appears. The track is stored in memory under the selected button. ⢠When a track has been selected from cus- tom playlist files and the button shown reversed is pressed for two seconds or longer, the track being played will be delet- ed. Note: ⢠You can record up to 99 tracks in a playlist file. ⢠The tracks are played back in the order in which they are stored. ⢠If an existing track is recorded again, it will be duplicated. Selecting a custom playlist file directly 1. Press NEXT to display âÂÂCSTM1â â âÂÂCSTM6âÂÂ. Press NEXT until âÂÂCSTM1â â âÂÂCSTM6â appears. 2. Press any of the buttons CSTM1 â CSTM6 to select the desired custom playlist file. Note: ⢠You can select the desired custom playlist file by pressing 5 or â . Deleting a track from a custom playlist file 1. Press NEXT to display âÂÂCSTM1â â âÂÂCSTM6âÂÂ. Press NEXT until âÂÂCSTM1â â âÂÂCSTM6â appears. 2. Press any of the buttons CSTM1 â CSTM6 to select the custom playlist file from which you wish to delete a track. 3. Press 2 2 or 3 3 to select the desired track. 4. Press and hold the button with the same number of the selected custom playlist file until âÂÂFinished erasingâ appears. The track currently playing is erased from the custom playlist file. 32 ENGLISH ESPAÃÂOL DEUTSCH FRANÃÂAIS ITALIANO NEDERLANDS
33 Music Ser ver Play S witching and scrolling the title You can switch the text display to view such information as artist name and track title. With text longer than 32 letters, you can scroll to see the rest of the text. ⢠When recording from the built-in CD it is pos- sible to take an artist name or track title, etc. from the built-in Gracenote CDDB database. (It is not possible to retrieve a title if there is no information on the CD in the database.) 1. Press TITLE to switch the title mode. 2. Press the corresponding button to dis- play the desired title. FORM 1 Button Operation P.L TTL Displays playlist file title. T.TTL Displays track title. ARTIST Displays track artist name. SCROLL Scrolls the displayed title. FORM 2 Button Operation P.L TTL Displays playlist file title and track title. TR ART Displays track title and track artist name. SCROLL Scrolls the displayed title. Note: ⢠If you do not operate the function within about eight seconds, the display is automatically returned. ⢠You cannot use 5 /â /2 /3 to select a playlist file or track in title mode. ⢠When you select the display form 2, the titles are displayed up to 24 letters long. ⢠If you have not input track titles, âÂÂNo titleâ is dis- played. Gracenote CDDB Gracenote is CDDB, Inc. d/b/a âÂÂGracenote.â CD-related data from Gracenote CDDB î , copy- right 1999, 2000, 2001 Gracenote. Gracenote CDDB Client Software, copyright 1999, 2000, 2001 CDDB, Inc. U.S. Patents Numbers #5,987,525; #6,061,680; #6,154,773, and other patents issued or pending. CDDB is a registered trademark of Gracenote. The Gracenote logo and the Gracenote CDDB logo are trademarks of Gracenote. Music Recognition Service and MRS are service marks of Gracenote. Music recognition technology and meta-data- base are provided by Gracenote and the Gracenote CDDB î Music Recognition Service. Gracenote is the industry standard in music recognition technology and related content delivery. For more information go to www.gracenote.com. Note: ⢠Pioneer is not responsible for Gracenote and the Gracenote CDDB service.
M usic ser ver function menu The music server function menu has the follow- ing functions: Note: ⢠If you do not operate the function within about 30 seconds, the display is automatically returned. (When you select title input modes (P.L.in, TRKin, ARTin), the display is not returned automatically.) R epeating play There are three repeat play ranges for the music server: one-track repeat, playlist file repeat and playlist mode repeat. 1. Press FUNC to select the repeat mode. 2. Press RPT to select the repeat range. Press RPT repeatedly to switch between the following repeat ranges: Track repeat (one-track repeat) = PlayList repeat (playlist file repeat) = PlayList mode repeat (playlist mode repeat) ⢠When the repeat mode is exited, either âÂÂT.RPTâ or âÂÂP.LISTRPTâ may appear on the basic display. â âÂÂT.RPTâ appears while the one-track repeat is selected. â âÂÂP.LISTRPTâ appears while the playlist file repeat is selected. Note: ⢠If you select other playlist files during repeat play, the repeat range changes to playlist mode repeat. ⢠If you perform track search or fast forward/reverse during one-track repeat, the repeat range changes to playlist file repeat. P laying tracks in random order Random play lets you play back tracks in the playlist file in random order. 1. Press FUNC and then press RDM to select the random mode. 2. Press RDM to turn random play on. The light illuminates. Tracks will play in ran- dom order. ⢠Press RDM again to turn random play off. ⢠When the random mode is exited while random play is on, âÂÂRDMâ appears on the basic display. Note: ⢠When you select the playlist mode repeat, when the random play of all tracks in the current file has been completed, random play will continue on the next file. S canning files and tracks When you select playlist file repeat, scan play lets you hear the first 10 seconds of each track in the selected playlist file. When you select playlist mode repeat, scan play lets you hear the first 10 seconds of the first track in each playlist file. 1. Select the repeat range. Refer to âÂÂRepeating playâ on this page. 2. Press FUNC and then press SCAN to select the scan mode. 3. Press SCAN to turn scan play on. The light illuminates. The first 10 seconds of each track in the current playlist file (or the first track of each playlist file) are played. ⢠When the scan mode is exited while scan play is on, âÂÂSCANâ appears on the basic display. Continued overleaf. 34 ENGLISH ESPAÃÂOL DEUTSCH FRANÃÂAIS ITALIANO NEDERLANDS
35 Music Ser ver Play 4. When you find the desired track (or playlist file), press SCAN to turn scan play off. The light goes off. The track (or playlist file) will continue to play. ⢠If the scan mode is automatically canceled, select the scan mode again. Note: ⢠After track or playlist file scanning is finished, nor- mal playback of the tracks will begin again. ⢠If you turn scan play on during one-track repeat, the repeat range changes to playlist file repeat. S electing tracks from the track title list The track title list lets you see the list of track titles in a playlist file and select one of them for playback. 1. Press FUNC and then press T.LIST to select the track title list mode. 2. Press NEXT to display the desired track title. Press NEXT until the desired track title appears. 3. Press the corresponding number button to select the desired track title. That selection will begin to play. Note: ⢠You can also use 2, 3 and 5 to select and play the desired track title. ⢠If you have not input track titles, âÂÂNo T.Titleâ is dis- played. ⢠When the playlist file changes, the track title list mode will be cancelled automatically. S electing files from the playlist file title list The playlist file title list lets you see the list of playlist file titles in a playlist mode and select one of them for playback. 1. Press FUNC and then press P.LIST to select the playlist file title list mode. 2. Press NEXT to display the desired playlist file title. Press NEXT until the desired playlist file title appears. 3. Press the corresponding number button to select the desired playlist file title. That selection will begin to play. Note: ⢠You can also use 2, 3 and 5 to select and play the desired playlist file title. ⢠If you have not input playlist file titles, âÂÂNo titleâ is displayed. ⢠If nothing is recorded on the music server, âÂÂNo audioâ is displayed. P ausing music ser ver playback Pause lets you temporarily stop playback of the music server. 1. Press FUNC and then press PAUSE to select the pause mode.
2. Press PAUSE to turn pause on. The light illuminates. Play of the current track pauses. ⢠Press PAUSE again to turn pause off. ⢠When the pause mode is exited while pause is on, âÂÂPAUSEâ is displayed in the basic display. Note: ⢠You can also turn pause on or off by pressing PAUSE in the following display. E ntering titles The playlist file title, track title and track artistâÂÂs name can each be up to 20 characters for entry into the music server. ⢠When the playlist file changes while entering a title, the title input mode will be cancelled automatically. ⢠If you retrieve a title of over 21 characters from the built-in database, this product will edit the entry and delete all characters beyond 21. ⢠If you edit a title from the built-in database, some characters on the title input display may become blank. Entering playlist file titles 1. Press 5 5 or â â to play a playlist file you want to enter the title. 2. Press FUNC and NEXT and then press P.L.in to select the playlist file title input mode. Refer to âÂÂEntering disc titlesâ on page 46, and perform procedures 3 to 7 in the same way. Entering track titles 1. Press FUNC and NEXT and then press TRKin to select the track title input mode. 2. Press 2 2 or 3 3 to play a track you want to enter the title. 3. Press 5 5 to switch the track title input dis- play. Refer to âÂÂEntering disc titlesâ on page 46, and perform procedures 3 to 7 in the same way. Note: ⢠When entering a track title, the track title will be given to the intended track, even in case of change to the next track. Entering track artist names 1. Press FUNC and NEXT and then press ARTin to select the track artist name input mode. 2. Press 2 2 or 3 3 to play a track you want to enter the artist name. 3. Press 5 5 to switch the artist name input display. Refer to âÂÂEntering disc titlesâ on page 46, and perform procedures 3 to 7 in the same way. Note: ⢠When entering an artistâÂÂs name, the artistâÂÂs name will be given to the intended track, even in case of change to the next track. ⢠The artistâÂÂs name entered with this product will not be recorded in the artist playlist file. 36 ENGLISH ESPAÃÂOL DEUTSCH FRANÃÂAIS ITALIANO NEDERLANDS
37 Music Ser ver Play S electing the playlist mode In playlist mode, a playlist file is used to distin- guish a group of tracks that have been defined as a group when recorded. This mode allows you to play back the tracks you want to hear as a group. (See page 31.) 1. Press FUNC and NEXT and then press P.MODE to select the playlist mode selec- tion mode. 2. Press P.MODE to select the desired playlist mode. Press P.MODE repeatedly to switch between the following mode: All (each recording date) = Digital (digital recordings) = Analog (analog recordings) = Artist (artist) = Custom (custom) Note: ⢠If you switch to playlist mode when nothing has been recorded, âÂÂNo PlayListâ or âÂÂNo audioâ is dis- played. D eleting tracks and track infor- mation In playlist mode it is possible to delete tracks and track information recorded in playlist mode. However, in âÂÂAllâ mode, the track data is delet- ed along with the track information. With the âÂÂAllâ mode, the confirmation screen will show other items than those selected, so always veri- fy this when using this mode. When selecting âÂÂAllâ When selecting other than âÂÂAllâ Erasing a track from playlist file Precaution: ⢠Once a track is erased, it can not be restored. Always check the confirmation screen before eras- ing. 1. Press 5 5 or â â to select the desired playlist file. 2. Press FUNC and then press NEXT twice. 3. Press ERStrk to select the one-track erase mode. 4. Press 2 2 or 3 3 to select the desired track. 5. Press 5 5 to erase the currently playing track from the playlist file. 6. Press 2 2 and then press 5 5 to select âÂÂYESâÂÂ. ⢠To prevent erasure of the track, press 3 3 and 5 5 and select âÂÂNOâÂÂ. Note: ⢠When the playlist file changes, the one-track erase mode will be cancelled automatically. ⢠You can not adjust the volume while âÂÂYESâ is selected and during erasing.
Erasing a playlist file from playlist mode Precaution: ⢠Once a playlist file is erased, it can not be restored. Always check the confirmation screen before eras- ing. 1. Press 5 5 or â â to select the playlist file you want to erase from playlist mode. 2. Press FUNC and then press NEXT twice. 3. Press ERSpl to select the playlist file erase mode. 4. Press 5 5 to erase the selected playlist file from playlist mode. 5. Press 2 2 and then press 5 5 to select âÂÂYESâÂÂ. ⢠To prevent erasure of the playlist file, press 3 3 and 5 5 and select âÂÂNOâÂÂ. Note: ⢠You can not adjust the volume while âÂÂYESâ is selected and during erasing. 38 ENGLISH ESPAÃÂOL DEUTSCH FRANÃÂAIS ITALIANO NEDERLANDS
39 âÂÂMemor y Stickâ Player D isplay and indicators FORM 1 FORM 2 q Source name w Bit rate indicator e Track number r Track title t Play time y Track artist name B asic operation The âÂÂMemory Stickâ player plays one âÂÂMagicGate Memory Stick (MG Memory Stick)â at a time. (See page 72.) 1. Press OPEN to open the front panel. 2. Insert a âÂÂMemory Stickâ into the MS load- ing slot until it clicks into position. 3. Close the front panel. 4. Press VOLUME to extend the VOLUME outward. ⢠When you press VOLUME, it extends out- ward so that it becomes easier to turn. To retract VOLUME, press it again. 5. Turn VOLUME to adjust the volume. 6. Press 2 2 or 3 3 to select a track. Pressing 3 skips to the start of the next track. Pressing 2 once skips to the start of the cur- rent track. Pressing again will skip to the previous track. ⢠If you press and hold 2 or 3, you can per- form fast forward or reverse. 7. Press OPEN and then press MS EJECT to eject the âÂÂMemory StickâÂÂ. ⢠The access lamp lights while data are being written. Never remove the âÂÂMemory Stickâ while the access lamp is lit, as other- wise data may be destroyed. ⢠Be sure to close the front panel after removing the âÂÂMemory StickâÂÂ. W ARNING: ⢠Do not use with the front panel left open. If the front panel is left open, it may result in injury in the event of an accident. Note: ⢠You can select âÂÂMemory Stickâ as the source by pressing SOURCE when a âÂÂMemory Stickâ is loaded in this product. ⢠When the front panel is open, multi-function but- tons are not available. ⢠Do not insert anything other than a âÂÂMemory Stickâ into the MS loading slot. ⢠A âÂÂMemory Stickâ left partially inserted after ejec- tion may incur damage or fall out. ⢠If the âÂÂMemory Stickâ player cannot operate proper- ly, an error message (such as âÂÂERROR-30âÂÂ) appears on the display. Refer to âÂÂUnderstanding âÂÂMemory Stickâ player error messagesâ on page 77. ⢠During playback of music data with a limited num- ber of playbacks, fast forward and reverse are not possible, so that the number of playbacks can be managed correctly. ⢠When TA interruption occurs during playback of music data with a limited number of playbacks, the number of playbacks is decreased by one. This can be prevented by setting TA interruption to OFF in advance. Access lamp MS EJECT button MS loading slot ry qe t rt qw e
S witching and scrolling the title You can switch text display such as artist name and track title. With text longer than 32 letters, you can scroll to see the rest of the text. 1. Press TITLE to switch the title mode. 2. Press the corresponding button to dis- play the desired title. FORM 1 Button Operation T.TTL Displays track title. ARTIST Displays track artist name. THNDR Displays thunderbolt animation. SCROLL Scrolls the displayed title. FORM 2 Button Operation SCROLL Scrolls the displayed title. Note: ⢠If you do not operate the function within about eight seconds, the display is automatically returned. ⢠You cannot use 2 or 3 to select a track in title mode. ⢠When you select the display form 2, the titles are displayed up to 24 letters long. ⢠If certain text information is not recorded on a âÂÂMemory StickâÂÂ, âÂÂNo ~â (e.g., âÂÂNo titleâÂÂ) is dis- played. âÂÂM emor y Stickâ player function menu The âÂÂMemory Stickâ player function menu has the following functions: Note: ⢠If you do not operate the function within about 30 seconds, the display is automatically returned. R epeating play Repeat play lets you hear the same track over again. 1. Press FUNC to select the repeat mode. 2. Press RPT to turn the repeat play on. The light illuminates. The track currently playing will play and then repeat. ⢠Press RPT again to turn repeat play off. ⢠When the repeat mode is exited while repeat play is on, âÂÂT.RPTâ appears on the basic display. Note: ⢠If you perform track search or fast forward/reverse, repeat play is automatically canceled. P laying tracks in random order Random play lets you play back tracks on the âÂÂMemory Stickâ in random order. 1. Press FUNC and then press RDM to select the random mode. 2. Press RDM to turn random play on. The light illuminates. Tracks will play in ran- dom order. ⢠Press RDM again to turn random play off. ⢠When the random mode is exited while random play is on, âÂÂRDMâ appears on the basic display. 40 ENGLISH ESPAÃÂOL DEUTSCH FRANÃÂAIS ITALIANO NEDERLANDS
41 âÂÂMemor y Stickâ Player S canning tracks of a âÂÂMemor y Stickâ Scan play lets you hear the first 10 seconds of each track on the âÂÂMemory StickâÂÂ. 1. Press FUNC and then press SCAN to select the scan mode. 2. Press SCAN to turn scan play on. The light illuminates. The first 10 seconds of each track are played. ⢠When the scan mode is exited while scan play is on, âÂÂSCANâ appears on the basic display. 3. When you find the desired track, press SCAN to turn scan play off. The light goes off. The track will continue to play. ⢠If the scan mode is automatically canceled, select the scan mode again. Note: ⢠After scanning of a âÂÂMemory Stickâ is finished, nor- mal playback of the tracks will begin again. S electing tracks from the track title list The track title list lets you see the list of track titles on a âÂÂMemory Stickâ and select one of them for playback. 1. Press FUNC and then press T.LIST to select the track title list mode. 2. Press NEXT to display the desired track title. Press NEXT until the desired track title appears. 3. Press the corresponding number button to select the desired track title. That selection will begin to play. Note: ⢠You can also use 2, 3 and 5 to select and play the desired track title. P ausing âÂÂMemor y Stickâ play- back Pause lets you temporarily stop playback of the âÂÂMemory StickâÂÂ. 1. Press FUNC and then press PAUSE to select the pause mode. 2. Press PAUSE to turn the pause on. The light illuminates. Play of the current track pauses. ⢠Press PAUSE again to turn the pause off. ⢠When the pause mode is exited while pause is on, âÂÂPAUSEâ is displayed in the basic display. Note: ⢠You can also turn pause on or off by pressing PAUSE in the following display.
E rasing tracks from the âÂÂMemor y Stickâ Tracks may be erased from the âÂÂMemory StickâÂÂ, either one track at a time or all at once. Erasing a track from the âÂÂMemor y Stickâ 1. Press FUNC and NEXT and then press ERStrk to select the one-track erase mode. 2. Press 2 2 or 3 3 to select the desired track. 3. Press 5 5 to erase the currently playing track from the âÂÂMemory StickâÂÂ. The confirmation screen appears. 4. Press 2 2 and then press 5 5 to select âÂÂYESâÂÂ. ⢠To prevent erasure of the track, press 3 and 5 and select âÂÂNOâÂÂ. Note: ⢠If you erase all tracks, the function menu will be cancelled and âÂÂNo audioâ is displayed. ⢠You can not adjust the volume while âÂÂYESâ is selected and during erasing. Erasing all tracks from the âÂÂMemor y Stickâ 1. Press FUNC and NEXT and then press ERSall to select the erase all tracks mode. 2. Press 5 5 to erase all tracks from the âÂÂMemory StickâÂÂ. The confirmation screen appears. 3. Press 2 2 and then press 5 5 to select âÂÂYESâÂÂ. When the tracks have been erased, the function menu is cancelled and âÂÂNo audioâ is displayed. ⢠To prevent erasure of all tracks, press 3 and 5 and select âÂÂNOâÂÂ. Note: ⢠You can not adjust the volume while âÂÂYESâ is selected and during erasing. 42 ENGLISH ESPAÃÂOL DEUTSCH FRANÃÂAIS ITALIANO NEDERLANDS
43 Multi-CD Player D isplay and indicators FORM 1 FORM 2 q Source name w Disc number e Track number r Disc title t Play time y Track title 50 -disc multi-CD player Only those functions described in this manual are supported for 50-disc multi-CD players. B asic operation This product can control a multi-CD player, which is sold separately. 1. Press SOURCE to select the multi-CD player. Press SOURCE until âÂÂMulti-CDâ appears. 2. Press VOLUME to extend the VOLUME outward. ⢠When you press VOLUME, it extends out- ward so that it becomes easier to turn. To retract VOLUME, press it again. 3. Turn VOLUME to adjust the volume. 4. Press 5 5 or â â to select a disc. A disc number for which there is no disc will be skipped. ⢠You can use the buttons 1 â 6 (or 7 â 12) to select a disc directly. 5. Press 2 2 or 3 3 to select a track. Pressing 3 skips to the start of the next track. Pressing 2 once skips to the start of the cur- rent track. Pressing again will skip to the previous track. ⢠If you press and hold 2 or 3, you can per- form fast forward or reverse. Note: ⢠When the multi-CD player is performing the preparatory operations, âÂÂReadyâ is displayed. ⢠If the multi-CD player cannot operate properly, an error message such as âÂÂERROR-12â is displayed. Refer to the multi-CD player ownerâÂÂs manual. ⢠If there are no discs in the multi-CD player maga- zine, âÂÂNo discâ is displayed. S electing a disc directly You can use the buttons 1 â 6 (or 7 â 12) to select a disc directly. 1. Press NEXT to display âÂÂ1â â âÂÂ6â (or âÂÂ7â â âÂÂ12âÂÂ). Press NEXT until âÂÂ1â â âÂÂ6â (or âÂÂ7â â âÂÂ12âÂÂ) appears. 2. Press any of the buttons 1 â 6 (or 7 â 12) to select a disc located at 1 to 6 (or 7 to 12). Note: ⢠You cannot display âÂÂ7â â âÂÂ12â when a 6-disc multi- CD player is connected. ry qw e t rt qw e
S witching and scrolling the title When playing a CD TEXT disc on a CD TEXT compatible multi-CD player, you can switch text display such as artist name and track title. With text longer than 32 letters, you can scroll to see the rest of the text. 1. Press TITLE to switch the title mode. 2. Press the corresponding button to dis- play the desired title. FORM 1 Button Operation D.TTL Displays disc title. D.ART Displays disc artist name. T.TTL Displays track title. T.ART Displays track artist name. THNDR Displays thunderbolt animation. SCROLL Scrolls the displayed title. FORM 2 Button Operation TTL1 Displays disc title and track title. TTL2 Displays disc title and disc artist name. TTL3 Displays track title and track artist name. SCROLL Scrolls the displayed title. Note: ⢠If you do not operate the function within about eight seconds, the display is automatically returned. ⢠You cannot use 5 /â /2 /3 to select a disc or track in title mode. ⢠When you select the display form 2, the titles are displayed up to 24 letters long. ⢠A CD TEXT disc is a CD featuring recorded text information such as disc title, artist name and track title. ⢠If certain text information is not recorded on a CD TEXT disc, âÂÂNo ~â (e.g., âÂÂNo titleâÂÂ) is displayed. ⢠If you have not input disc titles, âÂÂNo titleâ is dis- played. M ulti-CD player function menu The multi-CD player function menu has the fol- lowing functions: Note: ⢠If you do not operate the function within about 30 seconds, the display is automatically returned. (When you select the disc title input mode (TTLin) or ITS memory mode (ITS.M), the display is not returned automatically.) ⢠âÂÂT.LISTâ is displayed only when playing a CD TEXT disc on a CD TEXT compatible multi-CD player. R epeating play There are three repeat play ranges for the multi-CD player: one-track repeat, disc repeat and multi-CD player repeat. 1. Press FUNC to select the repeat mode. 2. Press RPT to select the repeat range. Press RPT repeatedly to switch between the following repeat ranges: Magazine repeat (multi-CD player repeat) = Track repeat (one-track repeat) = Disc repeat (disc repeat) ⢠When the repeat mode is exited, either âÂÂT.RPTâ or âÂÂD.RPTâ may appear on the basic display. â âÂÂT.RPTâ appears while the one-track repeat is selected. â âÂÂD.RPTâ appears while the disc repeat is selected. Note: ⢠If you select other discs during repeat play, the repeat range changes to multi-CD player repeat. ⢠If you perform track search or fast forward/reverse during one-track repeat, the repeat range changes to disc repeat. 44 ENGLISH ESPAÃÂOL DEUTSCH FRANÃÂAIS ITALIANO NEDERLANDS
45 Multi-CD Player P laying tracks in random order Random play lets you play back tracks in ran- dom order within the repeat range: multi-CD player repeat and disc repeat. 1. Select the repeat range. Refer to âÂÂRepeating playâ on page 44. 2. Press FUNC and then press RDM to select the random mode. 3. Press RDM to turn random play on. The light illuminates. Tracks will play in ran- dom order within the selected repeat range. ⢠Press RDM again to turn random play off. ⢠When the random mode is exited while random play is on, âÂÂRDMâ appears on the basic display. Note: ⢠If you turn random play on during one-track repeat, the repeat range changes to disc repeat. S canning CDs and tracks When you select disc repeat, scan play lets you hear the first 10 seconds of each track on the selected CD. When you select multi-CD player repeat, scan play lets you hear the first 10 sec- onds of the first track on each CD. 1. Select the repeat range. Refer to âÂÂRepeating playâ on page 44. 2. Press FUNC and then press SCAN to select the scan mode. 3. Press SCAN to turn scan play on. The light illuminates. The first 10 seconds of each track of the current disc (or the first track of each disc) are played. ⢠When the scan mode is exited while scan play is on, âÂÂSCANâ appears on the basic display. 4. When you find the desired track (or disc), press SCAN to turn scan play off. The light goes off. The track (or disc) will continue to play. ⢠If the scan mode is automatically canceled, select the scan mode again. Note: ⢠After track or disc scanning is finished, normal playback of the tracks will begin again. ⢠If you turn scan play on during one-track repeat, the repeat range changes to disc repeat. S electing tracks from the track title list The track title list lets you see the list of track titles on a CD TEXT disc and select one of them for playback. 1. Press FUNC and then press T.LIST to select the track title list mode. 2. Press NEXT to display the desired track title. Press NEXT until the desired track title appears. 3. Press the corresponding number button to select the desired track title. That selection will begin to play. Note: ⢠You can also use 2, 3 and 5 to select and play the desired track title. ⢠Only when playing a CD TEXT disc on a CD TEXT compatible multi-CD player, you can switch to this mode.
S electing discs from the disc title list The disc title list lets you see the list of disc titles and select one of them for playback. Displayed disc titles are those which have been entered into the multi-CD player or recorded on a CD TEXT disc. 1. Press FUNC and then press D.LIST to select the disc title list mode. 2. Press NEXT to switch between âÂÂ1â â âÂÂ6â and âÂÂ7â â âÂÂ12âÂÂ. 3. Press any of the buttons 1 â 6 (or 7 â 12) to select the desired disc title. That selection will begin to play. Note: ⢠You can also use 2, 3 and 5 to select and play the desired disc title. ⢠âÂÂNo D.Titleâ is displayed for a disc whose title has not been input. ⢠âÂÂNo discâ is displayed next to the disc number when no disc is set in the magazine. ⢠You cannot display âÂÂ7â â âÂÂ12â when a 6-disc multi- CD player is connected. P ausing CD playback Pause lets you temporarily stop playback of the CD. 1. Press FUNC and then press PAUSE to select the pause mode. 2. Press PAUSE to turn pause on. The light illuminates. Play of the current track pauses. ⢠Press PAUSE again to turn pause off. ⢠When the pause mode is exited while pause is on, âÂÂPAUSEâ is displayed in the basic display. Note: ⢠You can also turn pause on or off by pressing PAUSE in the following display. E ntering disc titles Disc title input lets you input up to 100 CD titles up to 10 letters long (with ITS memory) into the multi-CD player. If you input a CD title, the entered title is displayed. 1. Press 5 5 or â â to play a disc you want to enter the title. 2. Press FUNC and NEXT and then press TTLin to select the disc title input mode. 3. Press ABC to switch the character mode. Press ABC repeatedly to switch between the following modes: Alphabet (upper case), numbers and sym- bols = Alphabet (lower case) = European letters, such as those with accents (e.g. á, à, ä, ç) ⢠Press 012 to switch to the numbers and symbols mode. 4. Press 5 5 or â â to select letters, numbers and symbols. ⢠To insert a space, select the flashing cur- sor âÂÂ_âÂÂ. Continued overleaf. 46 ENGLISH ESPAÃÂOL DEUTSCH FRANÃÂAIS ITALIANO NEDERLANDS
47 Multi-CD Player 5. Press 3 3 to move the cursor to the next character position. ⢠Press 2 to move backwards in the display. 6. Press 3 3 to move the cursor to the last position and then press 3 3 one more time after entering the title. 7. Press BAND to cancel the disc title input mode. Note: ⢠When playing a CD TEXT disc on a CD TEXT com- patible multi-CD player, if you switch to this mode, âÂÂNo title inputâ is displayed and you cannot input the title. ⢠Titles remain in memory even after the disc has been removed from the magazine, and are recalled when the disc is reinserted. ⢠After the titles for 100 discs have been entered, the data for a new disc will overwrite the oldest one. U sing compression and dynamic bass emphasis Using the COMP (compression) and DBE (dynamic bass emphasis) functions enables multi-CD player sound quality adjustment. Each of the functions enables two-step adjustment. The COMP function adjusts imbalances between loud and subdued sounds at higher volumes. DBE boosts bass levels to give a fuller sound. 1. Press FUNC and NEXT and then press COMP to select the compression and dynamic bass emphasis mode. 2. Press COMP to select the desired setting. Press COMP repeatedly to switch between the following settings: COMP OFF = COMP 1 = COMP 2 = COMP OFF = DBE 1 = DBE 2 ⢠When this mode is exited except for âÂÂCOMP OFFâ is selected, âÂÂCOMPâ appears on the basic display. Note: ⢠If the multi-CD player does not support these func- tions, âÂÂNo COMPâ is displayed when you attempt to select it. U sing ITS memor y The ITS (instant track selection) lets you make a program of favorite tracks from those in the multi-CD player magazine. After you have added your favorite tracks to the ITS memory, you can turn on ITS play and play just those selections. Programming tracks in ITS memor y You can use ITS to enter and play back up to 99 tracks per disc for up to 100 discs (with the disc title). (With multi-CD players released before the CDX-P1250 and CDX-P650, the maximum number of programmable tracks is 24.) 1. Press 5 5 or â â to play the CD you want to program. 2. Press FUNC and NEXT and then press ITS.M to select the ITS memory mode. 3. Press 2 2 or 3 3 to select the desired track. 4. Press MEMO to store the currently play- ing track in the ITS memory. âÂÂMemory completeâ is displayed briefly and the currently playing track is added to ITS memory. 5. Press BAND to cancel the ITS memory mode. Note: ⢠In this mode, you can also use 5 to store the cur- rently playing track in the ITS memory. ⢠After 100 discs have been programmed, the data for a new disc will overwrite the oldest one.
Playback from ITS memor y ITS play lets you listen to the tracks that you have entered into ITS memory. When you turn on ITS play, tracks from ITS memory in the multi-CD player will begin to play. 1. Select the repeat range. Refer to âÂÂRepeating playâ on page 44. 2. Press FUNC and NEXT and then press ITS.P to select the ITS play mode. 3. Press ITS.P to turn ITS play on. The light illuminates. Playback begins of those tracks from ITS memory within the selected repeat range: multi-CD player repeat or disc repeat. ⢠Press ITS.P again to turn ITS play off. ⢠When the ITS play mode is exited while ITS play is on, âÂÂITSâ appears on the basic display. Note: ⢠If no track in the current play range is programmed for ITS play, âÂÂITS emptyâ is displayed. Erasing a track from ITS memor y When you want to erase a track from ITS mem- ory, you can do so when ITS play is on. 1. Turn ITS play on while playing a CD from which you want to erase a track program from ITS memory. Refer to âÂÂPlayback from ITS memoryâ on this page. 2. Press FUNC and NEXT and then press ITS.M to select the ITS memory mode. 3. Press 2 2 or 3 3 to select the desired track. 4. Press CLEAR to erase the currently play- ing track from ITS memory. The currently playing track is erased from ITS memory and playback of the next track from ITS memory begins. If there are no tracks from ITS memory in the current play range, âÂÂITS emptyâ is displayed and normal play resumes. 5. Press BAND to cancel the ITS memory mode. Note: ⢠In this mode, you can also use â to erase the cur- rently playing track from ITS memory. Erasing a CD from ITS memor y When you want to erase all tracks of a CD from ITS memory, you can do so when ITS play is off. 1. Press 5 5 or â â to select the CD you want to erase from ITS memory. If ITS play is on, turn ITS play off. Refer to âÂÂPlayback from ITS memoryâ on this page. 2. Press FUNC and NEXT and then press ITS.M to select the ITS memory mode. 3. Press CLEAR to erase all tracks on the currently playing CD from ITS memory. âÂÂMemory deletedâ is displayed briefly and all tracks on the currently playing CD are erased from ITS memory. 4. Press BAND to cancel the ITS memory mode. Note: ⢠In this mode, you can also use â to erase all tracks on the currently playing CD from ITS memory. 48 ENGLISH ESPAÃÂOL DEUTSCH FRANÃÂAIS ITALIANO NEDERLANDS
49 DAB T uner D isplay and indicators FORM 1 FORM 2 q Band w TRFC indicator e NEWS indicator r TXT indicator t Preset number y ANNC indicator u WTHR indicator i Service label o EXTRA indicator !0 DAB indicator !1 Service component label Indications that light when function is switched on Indicator Function W (THR)* Area weather flash (weather) A (NNC)* Announce (announce) N (EWS)* News flash (news) T (RFC)* Road traffic flash or transport flash * If the set announcement support is received, the letters in parentheses light. DAB status indications Indicator Status EXTRA The currently received service has a secondary service com- ponent. TXT The currently received service has a dynamic label. DAB When DAB reception is possi- ble. B asic operation 1. Press SOURCE to select the DAB tuner. Press SOURCE until âÂÂDAB Tunerâ appears. 2. Press VOLUME to extend the VOLUME outward. ⢠When you press VOLUME, it extends out- ward so that it becomes easier to turn. To retract VOLUME, press it again. 3. Turn VOLUME to adjust the volume. 4. Press 2 2 or 3 3 to select a service. 5. Press and hold 2 2 or 3 3 for one second and release to select an ensemble. i! 1 e! 0 qu t y w r o yu i o! 0 qw e r t The following explains how to use this product to control a DAB tuner, which is sold separately. For details of DAB tuner-specific operation/fea- tures, see your DAB tunerâÂÂs manual. ⢠This product does not have the language filter function. ⢠With this product, you can operate three addi- tional functions: available service list, available PTY search, storing and recalling dynamic label. ⢠DAB (digital audio broadcasting) refers to digital radio that broadcasts in Canada.
S toring and recalling ser vices Storing ser vices 1. Press NEXT to display âÂÂ1â â âÂÂ6âÂÂ. Press NEXT until âÂÂ1â â âÂÂ6â appears. 2. When you find a service that you want to store in memory, press and hold any of the buttons 1 â 6 until the preset number stops flashing. The service is stored in memory under the selected button. Recalling ser vices 1. Press NEXT to display âÂÂ1â â âÂÂ6âÂÂ. Press NEXT until âÂÂ1â â âÂÂ6â appears. 2. Press any of the buttons 1 â 6 to recall the service preset under that button. Note: ⢠You can also use 5 or â to recall services memo- rized under the buttons 1 â 6. C hanging band ⢠Press BAND to select the desired band. Press BAND repeatedly to switch between the following bands: DAB 1 = DAB 2 = DAB 3 S witching the display ⢠Press DISP to select the desired display. Press DISP repeatedly to switch between the following displays: FORM 1 SERVICE (service label) = COMPONENT (service component label) = D.TEXT (dynamic label segment head line) = ENSEMBLE (ensemble label) = PTY (PTY label) FORM 2 SERVICE (service label) and COMPO- NENT (service component label) = D.TEXT (dynamic label segment head line) = SERVICE (service label) and ENSEM- BLE (ensemble label) = SERVICE (service label) and PTY (PTY label) Note: ⢠With a service component that has no service com- ponent label or dynamic label, the display is blank when you switch to service component label and dynamic label. S witching the road traffic flash and transport flash on or off 1. Press NEXT to display âÂÂTAâÂÂ. Press NEXT until âÂÂTAâ appears. 2. Press TA to turn the road traffic flash and transport flash on. The â 3TRFCâ or âÂÂTâ indicator lights. ⢠Press TA again to turn the road traffic flash and transport flash off. Canceling road traffic flash and transport flash interruptions part way through 1. Press NEXT to display âÂÂTAâÂÂ. Press NEXT until âÂÂTAâ appears. 2. To cancel a road traffic flash or transport flash interruption and return to the origi- nal source, press the TA during an announcement interruption. 50 ENGLISH ESPAÃÂOL DEUTSCH FRANÃÂAIS ITALIANO NEDERLANDS
51 DAB T uner D ynamic label function Displaying dynamic labels 1. Press NEXT to display âÂÂD.TEXTâÂÂ. Press NEXT until âÂÂD.TEXTâ appears. 2. Press D.TEXT to switch to the dynamic label mode. 3. Press 2 2 or 3 3 to recall the three latest dynamic label broadcasts from the tunerâÂÂs memory. Pressing 2 or 3 switches between the four dynamic label data displays. Note: ⢠Press BAND to cancel the dynamic label mode. ⢠When no dynamic label is currently being received, âÂÂNo textâ is displayed. ⢠If there is no dynamic label data stored in the tuner, 2 /3 do not operate. ⢠If you do not operate the function within about 60 seconds, the display is automatically returned. Storing a dynamic label You can store data from up to six dynamic label transmissions under the buttons MEMO1 â MEMO6. 1. Select the dynamic label you want to store in memory. Refer to âÂÂDisplaying dynamic labelsâ on this page. 2. Press and hold any of the buttons MEMO1 â MEMO6 until âÂÂDAB memoâ appears to store the desired dynamic label. The dynamic label is stored in memory under the selected button. Recalling a dynamic label 1. Press NEXT to display âÂÂD.TEXTâÂÂ. Press NEXT until âÂÂD.TEXTâ appears. 2. Press D.TEXT to switch to the dynamic label mode 3. Press any of the buttons MEMO1 â MEMO6 to recall the dynamic label preset under that button. D AB tuner function menu The DAB tuner function menu has the following functions: q AS (announcement support) For operation of the announcement support, refer to âÂÂSetting the announcement support interruptionâ on page 52. w chLIST (preset service list) For operation of the preset service list, refer to âÂÂSelecting services from the preset ser- vice listâ on page 52. e S.LIST (available service list) For operation of the available service list, refer to âÂÂSelecting services from the avail- able service listâ on page 52. r PTY (available PTY search) For operation of the available PTY search, refer to âÂÂSearching the available PTYâ on page 52. t P/2ND (primary/secondary) Press P/2ND repeatedly to switch to the next service component. Note: ⢠If you do not operate the function within about 30 seconds, the display is automatically returned. qwe r t
S etting the announcement sup- port interruption 1. Press FUNC and then press AS to select the announcement support mode. 2. Press the corresponding button to turn the desired announcement support on. Button Announcement NEWS News flash WTHR Area weather flash ANNC Announcement Note: ⢠You can also use 2, 3 and 5 to select and turn on the desired announcement. S electing ser vices from the pre- set ser vice list 1. Press FUNC and then press chLIST to select the preset service list mode. 2. Press any of the buttons 1 â 6 to recall the desired service. Note: ⢠You can also use 2, 3 and 5 to select and recall the desired service. S electing ser vices from the avail- able ser vice list The available service list lets you see the list of available services and select one of them to receive, if the currently received ensemble has multiple services. 1. Press FUNC and then press S.LIST to select the available service list mode. 2. Press 2 2 or 3 3 to select the desired ser- vice. 3. Press 5 5 to receive the selected service. S earching the available PTY Available PTY search lets you see the list of available PTYs that is in the current ensemble and select one of them to receive. ⢠Available PTY search function is different from PTY search function. With this product, you can operate only the available PTY search. 1. Press FUNC and then press PTY to select the available PTY search mode. 2. Press 2 2 or 3 3 to select the desired PTY. 3. Press 5 5 to start the PTY search. DAB receives the desired PTY service. Note: ⢠The PTY method displayed is narrow. ⢠If there is no available PTY in the current ensemble, you cannot switch to the available PTY search mode. ⢠If no service broadcasting the selected program- ming type is found, âÂÂNot foundâ is displayed briefly, and the DAB tuner returns to the previous service. 52 ENGLISH ESPAÃÂOL DEUTSCH FRANÃÂAIS ITALIANO NEDERLANDS
53 TV T uner D isplay and indicators FORM 1 FORM 2 q Band w Preset number e Channel B asic operation 1. Press SOURCE to select the TV tuner. Press SOURCE until âÂÂTelevisionâ appears. 2. Press VOLUME to extend the VOLUME outward. ⢠When you press VOLUME, it extends for- ward so that it becomes easier to turn. To retract VOLUME, press it again. 3. Turn VOLUME to adjust the volume. 4. Press 2 2 or 3 3 to tune in to a station. ⢠If you press and hold 2 or 3 for about one second and then release, you can perform seek tuning. S toring and recalling broadcast stations If you press any of the buttons 1 â 6 (or 7 â 12), you can easily store up to 12 broadcast stations for later recall. Storing broadcast stations 1. Press NEXT to display âÂÂ1â â âÂÂ6â (or âÂÂ7â â âÂÂ12âÂÂ). Press NEXT until âÂÂ1â â âÂÂ6â (or âÂÂ7â â âÂÂ12âÂÂ) appears. 2. When you find a station that you want to store in memory, press and hold any of the buttons 1 â 6 (or 7 â 12) until the pre- set number stops flashing. The station is stored in memory under the selected button. Note: ⢠Up to 12 stations can be memorized in one band. ⢠This product allows you to store and recall directly using preset channels 7 âÂÂ12. e qw e qw The following explains how to use this product to control a TV tuner, which is sold separately. For details of TV tuner-specific operation/fea- tures, see your TV tunerâÂÂs manual. ⢠With this product, you can operate preset chan- nel list as one additional function.
54 ENGLISH ESPAÃÂOL DEUTSCH FRANÃÂAIS ITALIANO NEDERLANDS Recalling broadcast stations 1. Press NEXT to display âÂÂ1â â âÂÂ6â (or âÂÂ7â â âÂÂ12âÂÂ). Press NEXT until âÂÂ1â â âÂÂ6â (or âÂÂ7â â âÂÂ12âÂÂ) appears. 2. Press any of the buttons 1 â 6 (or 7 â 12) to recall the station preset under that but- ton. Note: ⢠You can also use 5 or â to recall broadcast sta- tions memorized under the buttons 1 â 12. C hanging band ⢠Press BAND to select the desired band. Press BAND repeatedly to switch between the following bands: TV 1 = TV 2 T V tuner function menu The TV tuner function menu has the following functions: q BSSM (best stations sequential memory) Press BSSM repeatedly to turn BSSM on or off. When finished, the display switches to the preset channel list mode. w chLIST (preset channel list) For operation of the preset channel list, refer to âÂÂSelecting channels from the preset chan- nel listâ on this page. Note: ⢠If you do not operate the function within about 30 seconds, the display is automatically returned. S electing channels from the pre- set channel list The preset channel list lets you see the list of preset channels and select one of them to receive. 1. Press FUNC and then press chLIST to select the preset channel list mode. 2. Press NEXT to switch between âÂÂ1â â âÂÂ6â and âÂÂ7â â âÂÂ12âÂÂ. 3. Press any of the buttons 1 â 6 (7 â 12) to recall the desired channel. Note: ⢠You can also use 2, 3 and 5 to select and recall the desired channel. qw
55 Audio Adjustments A djusting the audio easily The following functions let you easily adjust your audio system to match the car interior acoustic characteristics which vary depending on the type of car. ⢠Recalling equalizer curves (EEQ) ⢠Using position selector (POSI) ⢠Using time alignment (T.AL1) ⢠Adjusting equalizer curves (EQ1) A djusting the audio finely By carrying out the following settings/adjust- ments in order, you can create a finely-tuned sound field effortlessly. ⢠Using position selector (POSI) ⢠Using time alignment (T.AL1) ⢠Adjusting time alignment (T.AL2) ⢠Using subwoofer output (SW1) ⢠Adjusting subwoofer settings (SW2) ⢠Setting the high pass filter for front speakers (HPF F) ⢠Setting the high pass filter for rear speakers (HPF R) ⢠Using balance adjustment (F/B) ⢠Creating the auto-equalizer curve (A.EQ) ⢠Recalling equalizer curves (EEQ) ⢠Adjusting equalizer curves (EQ1) ⢠Adjusting 13-band graphic equalizer (EQ2) E xtra functions These functions are helpful in adjusting the sound to suit your system or your personal pref- erences. ⢠Using loudness (LOUD) ⢠Using sound field control, octaver and BBE sound (SFC) ⢠Using automatic sound levelizer (ASL) ⢠Adjusting source levels (SLA) ⢠Switching the digital attenuator (D.ATT) R ecalling equalizer cur ves The graphic equalizer lets you adjust equaliza- tion to match the car interior acoustic character- istics as desired. There are seven stored equal- izer curves which you can easily recall at any time. 1. Press EEQ to switch to the easy equalizer mode. 2. Press NEXT to switch between âÂÂCSTM2â and the other selections (curves). 3. Press the corresponding button to select the desired equalizer curve. Button Equalizer curve S.BASS Super bass PWRFL Powerful NATRL Natural VOCAL Vocal FLAT Flat CSTM1 Custom1 CSTM2 Custom2 ⢠âÂÂCUSTOM1â and âÂÂCUSTOM2â are adjusted equalizer curves that you can create for yourself. (Refer to âÂÂAdjusting 13-band graphic equalizerâ on page 57.) ⢠When âÂÂFLATâ is selected the equalizer makes no supplement or correction to the sound. This is useful for checking the effect of the equalizer curves by switching alternatively between âÂÂFLATâ and a set equalizer curve. Note: ⢠You can also use 2 and 3 to select the desired equalizer curve. ⢠If you do not operate the function within about eight seconds, the display is automatically returned.
A udio menu The audio menu has the following functions: Note: ⢠If you do not operate the function within about 30 seconds, the display is automatically returned. (When you select the 13-band graphic equalizer mode (EQ2) or the time alignment adjustment mode (T.AL2), the display is not returned automatically.) ⢠âÂÂT.AL2â is displayed only when you select âÂÂFLâ or âÂÂFRâ in the position selector mode (POSI). ⢠âÂÂSW2â is displayed only when the subwoofer output is on in the subwoofer output mode (SW1). ⢠âÂÂSLAâ is not displayed when you select FM tuner as the source. ⢠âÂÂA.EQâ is displayed after the auto-equalizer curve has been set. U sing balance adjustment You can select a fader/balance setting that pro- vides an ideal listening environment in all occu- pied seats. 1. Press AUDIO to select the fader/balance mode. 2. Press 5 5 or â â to adjust front/rear speaker balance. Each press of 5 or â moves the front/rear speaker balance towards the front or the rear. ⢠âÂÂFADER F25â â âÂÂFADER R25â is displayed as the front/rear speaker balance moves from front to rear. ⢠âÂÂFADER FR00â is the proper setting when only two speakers are used. 3. Press 2 2 or 3 3 to adjust left/right speaker balance. Each press of 2 or 3 moves the left/right speaker balance towards the left or the right. ⢠âÂÂBALANCE L25â â âÂÂBALANCE R25â is dis- played as the left/right speaker balance moves from left to right. U sing loudness Loudness compensates for deficiencies in the low- and high-sound ranges at low volume. 1. Press AUDIO and then press LOUD to select the loudness mode. 2. Press LOUD to turn the loudness on. âÂÂLOUDNESS ONâ appears in the display. ⢠Press LOUD again to turn loudness off. U sing sound field control, octaver and BBE R sound SFC (sound field control) incorporates four pro- grams reproducing the typical sound field of a studio, club, concert hall or dome. This function makes it possible to reproduce the realistic sound fields of the four programs in your car. Octaver makes the bass sound louder. Playback very close to the original sound can be obtained by correction with a combination of phase compensation and high-range boost for the delay of the high-frequency components and the amplitude deviation occurring during playback. This function makes it possible to reproduce the dynamic sound field as if you are listening to a live performance. Note: ⢠Manufactured under license from BBE Sound, Inc. The mark BBE is a trademark of BBE Sound, Inc. 56 ENGLISH ESPAÃÂOL DEUTSCH FRANÃÂAIS ITALIANO NEDERLANDS
57 Audio Adjustments Recalling sound field programs 1. Press AUDIO and then press SFC to select the sound field control mode. 2. Press the corresponding button to select the desired sound field program. Button Effect STUDIO Studio CLUB Club HALL Concert hall DOME Dome OCT Octaver 1 and 2 BBE BBE ⢠Press the same button again to cancel the selected sound field program. Switching the octaver setting You can switch the octaver setting. âÂÂOCTAVER2â has a stronger effect âÂÂOCTAVER1âÂÂ. 1. Press AUDIO and SFC and then press OCT to select octaver. 2. Press 5 5 or â â to switch the octaver set- ting. Each press of 5 or â switches the octaver setting between 1 and 2. Adjusting BBE sound level For BBE sound processing technology, you can adjust the level of BBE. 1. Press AUDIO and SFC and then press BBE to select BBE. 2. Press 5 5 or â â to adjust the level of BBE. Each press of 5 or â increases or decreas- es the level of BBE. ⢠â 4â â âÂÂâÂÂ4â is displayed as the level is increased or decreased. A djusting equalizer cur ves The factory supplied equalizer curves, with the exception of âÂÂFLATâÂÂ, can be adjusted to a fine degree (nuance control). 1. Press AUDIO and then press EQ1 to select the graphic equalizer mode. 2. Press 5 5 or â â to adjust the equalizer curve. Each press of 5 or â increases or decreas- es the equalizer curve respectively. ⢠â 6â â âÂÂâÂÂ6â is displayed as the equalizer curve is increased or decreased. Note: ⢠The actual range of the adjustment differs depend- ing on which equalizer curve is selected. ⢠The equalizer curve with all frequencies set to 0 cannot be adjusted. ⢠You can use 2 and 3 to select the desired equaliz- er curve. A djusting 13-band graphic equal- izer For âÂÂCUSTOM1â and âÂÂCUSTOM2â equalizer curves, you can adjust the level of each band. ⢠A separate âÂÂCUSTOM1â curve can be created for each source. (The built-in CD (MP3) and the multi-CD players are set to the same equalizer adjustment setting automatically.) If you make adjustments when a curve other than âÂÂCUSTOM2â is selected, the equalizer curve settings will be memorized in âÂÂCUS- TOM1âÂÂ. ⢠A âÂÂCUSTOM2â curve can be created common to all sources. If you make adjustments when the âÂÂCUSTOM2â curve is selected, the âÂÂCUS- TOM2â curve will be updated.
1. Recall the equalizer curve you want to adjust. Refer to âÂÂRecalling equalizer curvesâ on page 55. 2. Press AUDIO and then press EQ2 to select the 13-band graphic equalizer mode. 3. Press 2 2 or 3 3 to select the equalizer band to be adjusted. Each press of 2 or 3 selects equalizer bands in the following order: 50 à80 à125 à200 à315 à500 à800 à1.25k à2k à3.15k à5k à8k à12.5k (Hz) 4. Press 5 5 or â â to adjust the level of the equalizer band. Each press of 5 or â increases or decreas- es the level of the equalizer band. ⢠â 6â â âÂÂâÂÂ6â is displayed as the level is increased or decreased. ⢠You can then select another band and adjust the level. U sing automatic sound levelizer During driving, noise in the car changes accord- ing to the driving speed and road conditions. The automatic sound levelizer (ASL) monitors such varying noise and automatically increases the volume level, if the noise becomes greater. The sensitivity (variation of volume level to noise level) of ASL can be set to one of five lev- els. 1. Press AUDIO and then press ASL to select the automatic sound levelizer mode. 2. Press ASL to set the automatic sound levelizer sensitivity. Press ASL repeatedly to switch between the following settings: OFF (off) = Low (low) = Mid-Low (mid-low) = Mid (mid) = Mid-High (mid-high) = High (high) ⢠When the ASL mode is exited except for âÂÂOFFâ is selected, âÂÂASLâ appears on the basic display. U sing position selector One way to assure a more natural sound is to clearly position the stereo image, putting you right in the center of the sound field. The position selector function lets you automati- cally adjust the speakersâ output levels and inserts a delay time to match the number and position of occupied seats. The result is a natural sound regardless of where you are seated. 1. Press AUDIO and NEXT and then press POSI to select the position selector mode. 2. Press the corresponding button to select a listening position. Button Position FL Front seat left FR Front seat right FRONT Front seats ALL All seats ⢠Press the same button again to cancel the selected listening position. Note: ⢠You can also use 5, âÂÂ, 2 or 3 to select the listen- ing position. Button Position 2 Front seat left 3 Front seat right 5 Front seats â All seats 58 ENGLISH ESPAÃÂOL DEUTSCH FRANÃÂAIS ITALIANO NEDERLANDS
59 Audio Adjustments U sing time alignment The time alignment lets you adjust the distance between each speaker and the listening posi- tion to match the type of car. There are five types of car stored which you can easily recall at any time. 1. Press AUDIO and NEXT and then press T.AL1 to select the time alignment mode. 2. Press the corresponding button to select the type of car. Button Type of car SEDAN Sedan WAGON Wagon M.VAN Mini van SUV SUV CUSTM Custom ⢠âÂÂCustomâ is an adjusted time alignment that you can create for yourself. Adjusting time alignment For âÂÂCustomâ time alignment, you can adjust the distance between each speaker and the selected position. 1. Press AUDIO and NEXT and then press T.AL2 to select the time alignment adjust- ment mode. 2. Press the corresponding button to select a unit of distance. Button Unit of distance cm Centimeter inch Inch 3. Press 2 2 or 3 3 to select the speaker to be adjusted. Each press of 2 or 3 selects speakers in the following order: Front Left (front left) àFront Right (front right) àRear Right (rear right) àRear Left (rear left) àSub. W (subwoofer) ⢠You cannot select âÂÂSUB.Wâ when the sub- woofer output is off. 4. Press 5 5 or â â to adjust the distance between the selected speaker and the lis- tening position. Each press of 5 or â increases or decreas- es the distance. ⢠âÂÂ400.0cmâ â âÂÂ0.0cmâ is displayed as the distance is increased or decreased, if you have selected centimeters (cm). ⢠âÂÂ160inchâ â âÂÂ0inchâ is displayed as the dis- tance is increased or decreased, if you have selected inches. ⢠You can adjust the distance for the other speakers in the same way. Note: ⢠âÂÂT.AL2â is not displayed when neither âÂÂFLâ or âÂÂFRâ is selected in the position selector mode (POSI). If âÂÂFLâ or âÂÂFRâ is not selected, âÂÂT.AL2â is inactive. U sing subwoofer output This product is equipped with a subwoofer out- put which can be switched on or off. When a subwoofer is connected to this product, turn the subwoofer output on. The subwoofer output phase can be switched between normal and reverse. 1. Press AUDIO and NEXT and then press SW1 to select the subwoofer output mode. 2. Press SW1 to turn the subwoofer output on. âÂÂSUB. W ONâ appears in the display. ⢠Press SW1 again to turn subwoofer output off. 3. Press 2 2 or 3 3 to select the subwoofer output phase. Press 2 to select reverse phase. Press 3 to select normal phase.
Adjusting subwoofer settings When the subwoofer output is on, you can adjust the cut-off frequency and the output level of the subwoofer. 1. Press AUDIO and NEXT and then press SW2 to select the subwoofer setting mode. 2. Press 2 2 or 3 3 to select the cut-off fre- quency. Each press of 2 or 3 selects cut-off fre- quencies in the following order: 50 à63 à80 à100 à125 (Hz) 3. Press 5 5 or â â to adjust the output level of the subwoofer. Each press of 5 or â increases or decreas- es the level of the subwoofer. ⢠â 6â â âÂÂâÂÂ24â is displayed as the level is increased or decreased. Note: ⢠âÂÂSW2â is not displayed when the subwoofer output is off in the subwoofer output mode (SW1). In this case, this mode is inactive. U sing the high pass filter When the subwoofer is connected and you do not want low sound to play from the front or rear speakers, turn the high pass filter on. Only fre- quencies higher than those in the selected range will be output from the front or rear speakers. Setting the high pass filter for front speakers 1. Press AUDIO and NEXT and then press HPF F to select the high pass filter mode. 2. Press HPF F to turn the high pass filter on. âÂÂHPF ONâ appears in the display. ⢠Press HPF F again to turn the high pass fil- ter off. 3. Press 2 2 or 3 3 to select a high pass filter range. Each press of 2 or 3 selects frequencies in the following order: 50 à63 à80 à100 à125 (Hz) Setting the high pass filter for rear speakers 1. Press AUDIO and then press NEXT twice. 2. Press HPF R to select the high pass filter mode. 3. Press HPF R to turn the high pass filter on. âÂÂHPF ONâ appears in the display. ⢠Press HPF R again to turn the high pass filter off. 4. Press 2 2 or 3 3 to select a high pass filter range. Each press of 2 or 3 selects frequencies in the following order: 50 à63 à80 à100 à125 (Hz) 60 ENGLISH ESPAÃÂOL DEUTSCH FRANÃÂAIS ITALIANO NEDERLANDS
Audio Adjustments A djusting source levels SLA (source level adjustment) lets you adjust the volume level of each source to prevent radi- cal changes in volume when switching between sources. ⢠Settings are based on the FM tuner volume level, which remains unchanged. 1. Compare the FM tuner volume level with the level of the source you want to adjust (e.g., built-in CD player). 2. Press AUDIO and then press NEXT twice. 3. Press SLA to select the SLA mode. 4. Press 5 5 or â â to adjust the source vol- ume. Each press of 5 or â increases or decreas- es the source volume. ⢠â 4â â âÂÂâÂÂ4â is displayed as the source vol- ume is increased or decreased. Note: ⢠Since the FM tuner volume is the control, it is not possible to apply source level adjustments to the FM tuner. ⢠The AM tuner volume level can also be adjusted using source level adjustment. ⢠The built-in CD (MP3) and the multi-CD players are both set to the same source level adjustment vol- ume automatically. U sing the auto-equalizer The auto-equalizer is the equalizer curve creat- ed by auto-equalizing. (Refer to âÂÂCreating the auto-equalizer curveâ on this page.) You can turn the auto-equalizer on or off. 1. Press AUDIO and then press NEXT twice. 2. Press A.EQ to select the auto-equalizer on/off mode. 3. Press A.EQ to turn the auto-equalizer on. âÂÂAUTO EQ ONâ appears in the display. ⢠Press A.EQ again to turn auto-equalizer off. Note: ⢠âÂÂA.EQâ is not displayed if auto-equalizing has not been carried out. In this case, this mode is inactive. S witching the digital attenuator When listening to a CD or other source on which the recording level is high, setting the equalizer curve level to high may result in dis- tortion. You can switch the digital attenuator to low to reduce distortion. ⢠Sound quality is better at the high setting, so this is the setting usually used. 1. Press AUDIO and then press NEXT twice. 2. Press D.ATT to select the digital attenua- tor mode. 3. Press the corresponding button to select the digital attenuator level. Button Level LOW Low HIGH High C reating the auto-equalizer cur ve The auto-equalizer automatically measures car interior acoustic characteristics, and then cre- ates the auto-equalizer curve based on that information. W ARNING: ⢠To prevent accidents, never carry out auto- equalizing while driving. When this function measures the car interior acoustic characteris- tics to create an auto-equalizer curve, a loud measurement tone (noise) may be output from the speakers. 61
PRECAUTION: ⢠Carrying out auto-equalizing under the follow- ing conditions may damage the speakers. Be sure to check conditions thoroughly before carrying out auto-equalizing. â When speakers are incorrectly connected. (e.g., When a rear speaker is connected to a subwoofer output.) â When a speaker is connected to a power amp delivering output higher than the speak- erâÂÂs maximum input power capability. ⢠If the microphone is placed in an unsuitable position the measurement tone may become loud and measurement may take a long time, resulting in a drain on battery power. Be sure to place the microphone in the specified loca- tion. (Refer to âÂÂCarrying out auto-equalizing.) Before operating the auto-equalization function ⢠Carry out auto-equalizing in as quiet a place as possible, with the car engine and air condi- tioning switched off. Also cut power to car phones or portable telephones in the car, or remove from the car before carrying out auto- equalizing. Sounds other than the measure- ment tone (surrounding sounds, engine sound, telephones ringing etc.) may prevent correct measurement of car interior acoustic characteristics. ⢠Be sure to carry out auto-equalizing using the supplied microphone. Using another micro- phone may prevent measurement, or result in incorrect measurement of car interior acoustic characteristics. ⢠Neither front nor rear speaker is connected, auto-equalizing cannot be carried out. ⢠When this product is connected to a power amp with input level control, auto-equalizing may not be possible if you lower power amp input level. Set the power ampâÂÂs input level to the standard position. ⢠Auto-equalizing changes the audio settings as below: â The fader/balance settings return to the cen- ter position. (Refer to page 56.) â The graphic equalizer curve switches to âÂÂFLATâÂÂ. (Refer to page 55.) â When a subwoofer is connected to this prod- uct, it will be adjusted automatically either subwoofer output and high pass filter setting for rear speaker. ⢠If you carry out auto-equalizing when an auto- equalizer curve already exists, the previous curve will be erased. Carr ying out auto-equalizing 1. Stop the car in a place that is as quiet as possible, close all doors, windows and the sun roof, and then turn the engine off. If the engine is left running, engine noise may prevent correct auto-equalizing. 2. Fix the supplied microphone in the center of the headrest of the driverâÂÂs seat, facing forward, using the belt (sold separately). The auto-equalizer curve may differ depend- ing on where you place the microphone. If desired, place the microphone on the front passenger seat to carry out auto-equalizing. Continued overleaf. 62 ENGLISH ESPAÃÂOL DEUTSCH FRANÃÂAIS ITALIANO NEDERLANDS
Audio Adjustments 3. Turn the ignition switch to ON or ACC. If the carâÂÂs air conditioner or heater is turned on, turn it off. Noise from the fan in the air conditioner or heater may prevent correct auto-equalizing. ⢠Press SOURCE to turn the source on if this product is turned off. 4. Select the position for the seat on which the microphone is placed. Refer to âÂÂUsing position selectorâ on page 58. ⢠If no position is selected before you start auto-equalizing, âÂÂFLâ is selected automati- cally. 5. Press and hold SOURCE to turn the source off. 6. Press and hold 2 to enter the auto- equalizer measurement mode. ⢠When the source is off, you can check the location of â 2â by turning on the feature demo. 7. Plug the microphone into the microphone input jack on this product. Remove the microphone input jack cap and plug in the microphone. 8. Press A.EQ to start the auto-equalizing. 9. Get out of the car and close the door within 10 seconds when the 10-second count-down starts. The measurement tone (noise) is output from the speakers, and auto-equalizing (acoustic characteristics measurement and compensation) begins. ⢠When all speakers are connected, auto- equalizing is completed in about four min- utes. ⢠To cancel auto-equalizing part way through, press any button. 10. When auto-equalizing is completed, âÂÂCompleteâ is displayed. When correct measurement of car interior acoustic characteristics is not possible, an error message is displayed. (Refer to âÂÂUnderstanding auto-equalizing error mes- sagesâ on page 73.) 11. Press any button to cancel the auto- equalizer mode. 12. Store the microphone and microphone input jack carefully in the safe place. Store the microphone carefully in the glove compartment or other safe place. If the microphone is subjected to direct sunlight for an extended period, high temperatures may cause distortion, color change or malfunc- tion. W ARNING: ⢠After attaching the microphone input jack cap, store it in a safe place. If the microphone input jack cable tangles with the accelerator pedal, it can hamper driving and be extremely dan- gerous. 63
Initial Settings 64 ENGLISH ESPAÃÂOL DEUTSCH FRANÃÂAIS ITALIANO NEDERLANDS I nitial settings menu The initial settings menu has the following func- tions: Initial settings menu operation You can operate the initial settings menu only when the source is off. 1. Press and hold SOURCE to turn the source off. 2. Press and hold 1 to enter the initial settings menu. ⢠When the source is off, you can check the location of â 1â by turning on the feature demo. Note: ⢠Press BAND to cancel the initial settings menu. U sing reverse mode If you do not carry out an operation within about 30 seconds, screen indications will start to reverse, and then continue reversing every 10 seconds. You can turn the reverse mode on or off. 1. With the source turned off, press and hold 1 to select the reverse mode. 2. Press REV to turn the reverse mode on. âÂÂONâ appears in the display. ⢠Press REV again to turn the reverse mode off. U sing the feature demo The feature demo automatically starts when power to this product is switched off while the ignition switch is set to ACC or ON. You can turn the feature demo on or off. 1. With the source turned off, press and hold 1. 2. Press F.DEMO to select the feature demo mode. 3. Press F.DEMO to turn the feature demo on. âÂÂONâ appears in the display. ⢠Press F.DEMO again to turn the feature demo off. Note: ⢠The red lead (ACC) of this product should be con- nected to a terminal coupled with ignition switch ON/OFF operations. If this is not done, the vehicle battery may be drained. S witching the auxiliar y setting It is possible to use auxiliary equipment with this product. Turn the auxiliary setting on when using auxil- iary equipment connected to this product. 1. With the source turned off, press and hold 1. 2. Press AUX to select the AUX mode. 3. Press AUX to turn AUX on. âÂÂONâ appears in the display. ⢠Press AUX again to turn AUX off.
65 Initial Settings S witching the telephone muting/attenuation setting When a call is made or received using a cellular phone connected to this product, the product can be set to either mute or attenuate the audio output. 1. With the source turned off, press and hold 1. 2. Press MUTE.S to select the telephone muting/attenuation mode. 3. Press MUTE.S to select the desired set- ting. Press MUTE.S repeatedly to switch between the following settings: TEL mute = 10dB ATT = 20dB ATT Sound from this product is muted or attenu- ated automatically when a call is made or received using a connected cellular tele- phone. ⢠âÂÂ20dB ATTâ has a stronger effect than âÂÂ10dB ATTâÂÂ, and âÂÂTEL muteâ has a stronger effect than âÂÂ20dB ATTâÂÂ. F ormatting the âÂÂMemor y Stickâ When this product can not read an inserted âÂÂMemory StickâÂÂ, the âÂÂMemory Stickâ must be formatted by this product. Formatting a âÂÂMemory Stickâ erases all data stored on it. Note: ⢠When formatting, all data will be erased. Always confirm the contents of the âÂÂMemory Stickâ before erasing. ⢠When purchasing a commercially available âÂÂMemory StickâÂÂ, it is already FAT-formatted, so fur- ther formatting is unnecessary. 1. With the source turned off, press and hold 1. 2. Press UTLTY to select the format mode. 3. Press OPEN to open the front panel. 4. Insert a âÂÂMemory Stickâ into the MS load- ing slot until it clicks into position. 5. Close the front panel. 6. Press 5 to format a âÂÂMemory StickâÂÂ. The confirmation screen appears. 7. Press 2 and then press 5 to select âÂÂYâÂÂ. When formatting is completed, âÂÂFinishedâ is displayed. ⢠If you press 3 3 and 5 to select âÂÂNâÂÂ, format- ting will be terminated. MS EJECT button MS loading slot
S etting the warning tone The warning tone sounds to remind you to detach the front panel. (Refer to page 13.) You can turn the warning tone function on or off. 1. With the source turned off, press and hold 1. 2. Press NEXT and then press DT-WRN to select the warning tone mode. 3. Press DT-WRN to turn the warning tone on. âÂÂONâ appears in the display. ⢠Press DT-WRN again to turn the warning tone off. 66 ENGLISH ESPAÃÂOL DEUTSCH FRANÃÂAIS ITALIANO NEDERLANDS
67 Other Functions A ttenuating volume The attenuator lets you lower the volume level quickly (by about 90%). ⢠Press ATT to turn the attenuator on. âÂÂATTâ appears in the display. ⢠Press ATT again to turn the attenuator off and return to the original volume level. C hanging the display form This product is equipped with two basic dis- plays. You can select the desired display. 1. Press NEXT to display âÂÂC.MENUâÂÂ. Press NEXT until âÂÂC.MENUâ appears. 2. Press C.MENU and then press D.FORM to select the display form mode. 3. Press either FORM1 or FORM2 to select the desired display form. A djusting the brightness Display brightness adjustment lets you adjust the display for easier viewing when lighting con- ditions change. 1. Press NEXT to display âÂÂC.MENUâÂÂ. Press NEXT until âÂÂC.MENUâ appears. 2. Press C.MENU and then press BRGHT to select the brightness mode. 3. Press 2 2 or 3 3 to adjust the brightness. Each press of 2 or 3 increases or decreas- es the brightness. ⢠âÂÂ00â â âÂÂ31â is displayed as the brightness is increased or decreased. S witching the dimmer setting To prevent the display from being too bright at night, the display is automatically dimmed when the carâÂÂs headlights are turned on. You can switch the dimmer on or off. 1. Press NEXT to display âÂÂC.MENUâÂÂ. Press NEXT until âÂÂC.MENUâ appears. 2. Press C.MENU and then press DMMER to select the dimmer mode. 3. Press DMMER to turn the dimmer on. âÂÂONâ appears on the display. ⢠Press DMMER again to turn the dimmer off. S electing the wall paper pattern The wall paper pattern is only for display form 2 âÂÂFORM2âÂÂ, and there are three patterns to choose from. ⢠When you select âÂÂFORM1âÂÂ, âÂÂPTRNâ is not dis- played and this mode is inactive. 1. Press NEXT to display âÂÂC.MENUâÂÂ. Press NEXT until âÂÂC.MENUâ appears. 2. Press C.MENU and then press PTRN to select the wall paper pattern mode. 3. Press any of the buttons A â C to select the desired pattern. S etting the entertainment display You can change the display to the movie screens, the spectrum analyzer displays, etc., while listening to any source. Setting the movie screen There are four stored movie screens to select from.
1. Press ENT and then press MOVIE to select the movie mode. 2. Press any of the buttons MOVIE1 â MOVIE4 or ALL to select the desired movie. ⢠When you press ALL, you can display movies 1 to 4 sequentially. Note: ⢠The movie screen will disappear temporarily when you perform other operations, but will be displayed again after three seconds. Setting the spectrum analyzer display There are four stored spectrum analyzer dis- plays to select from. 1. Press ENT and then press S/A to select the spectrum analyzer mode. 2. Press any of the buttons S/A1 â S/A4 to select the desired spectrum analyzer. Note: ⢠The spectrum analyzer display will disappear tem- porarily when you perform other operations, but will be displayed again after three seconds. Setting the ASL display You can display the ASL effect level. (Refer to page 58.) ⢠Press ENT and then press ASL to select the ASL display. Note: ⢠The ASL display will disappear temporarily when you perform other operations, but will be displayed again after three seconds. Setting the background visual The background visuals are only for display form 1 âÂÂFORM1âÂÂ. There are five stored back- ground visuals to select from. ⢠When you select âÂÂFORM2âÂÂ, âÂÂBGâ is not dis- played and this mode is inactive. 1. Press ENT and BG and then press BGV to select the background visual mode. 2. Press any of the buttons BGV1 â BGV5 to select the desired visual. Setting the background still picture The background still pictures are only for the display form 1 âÂÂFORM1âÂÂ. There are 12 stored background still pictures to select from. ⢠When you select âÂÂFORM2âÂÂ, âÂÂBGâ is not dis- played and this mode is inactive. 1. Press ENT and BG and then press BGP to select the background still picture mode. 2. Press NEXT to switch between âÂÂBGP1â â âÂÂBGP6â and âÂÂBGP7â â âÂÂBGP12âÂÂ. 3. Press any of the buttons BGP1 â BGP6 (or BGP7 â BGP12) to select the desired picture. Canceling the entertainment display You can cancel the entertainment display (the movie screens, the spectrum analyzer displays, etc.). ⢠Press ENT and then press OFF to cancel the entertainment display. 68 ENGLISH ESPAÃÂOL DEUTSCH FRANÃÂAIS ITALIANO NEDERLANDS
69 Other Functions U sing the AUX source An IP-BUS-RCA interconnector such as the CD-RB20 or CD-RB10 (sold separately) lets you connect this product to auxiliary equipment featuring RCA output. For more details, refer to the IP-BUS-RCA interconnectorâÂÂs ownerâÂÂs man- ual. Selecting AUX as the source ⢠Press SOURCE to select AUX as the source. Press SOURCE until âÂÂAUXâ appears. Entering the AUX title The title displayed for the AUX source can be changed. 1. Press SOURCE to select AUX as the source. Press SOURCE until âÂÂAUXâ appears. 2. Press FUNC and then press TTLin to select the AUX title input mode. Refer to âÂÂEntering disc titlesâ on page 46, and perform procedures 3 to 7 in the same way. Note: ⢠Even if you do not press TTLin you can enter the title, but you will not be able to change the charac- ter types. U sing the telephone muting/ attenuation Sound from this product is muted or attenuated automatically when a call is made or received using a connected cellular telephone. Note: ⢠The sound turns off, âÂÂMUTEâ or âÂÂATTâ is displayed and no audio adjustments, except volume control, are possible. ⢠Operation returns to normal when the phone call is ended.
Additional Information CD player and care ⢠Use only CDs that carry either of the two Compact Disc Digital Audio marks shown below. ⢠Use only normal, round CDs. If you insert irregular, non-round, shaped CDs they may jam in the CD player or not play properly. ⢠Check all CDs for cracks, scratches or warp- ing before playing. CDs that are cracked, scratched or warped may not play properly. Do not use such discs. ⢠Avoid touching the recorded (non-printed side) surface when handling the disc. ⢠Store discs in their cases when not in use. ⢠Keep discs out of direct sunlight and do not expose the discs to high temperatures. ⢠Do not attach labels, write on or apply chemi- cals to the surface of the discs. ⢠To clean dirt from a CD, wipe the disc with a soft cloth outward from the center of the disc. ⢠If the heater is used in cold weather, moisture may form on components inside the CD play- er. Condensation may cause the CD player not to operate properly. If you think that con- densation is a problem, turn off the CD player for an hour or so to allow the CD player to dry out and wipe any damp discs with a soft cloth to remove the moisture. ⢠Road shocks may interrupt CD playback. ⢠SACD (Super Audio CD) refers to the ability to play back only the CD layer on a hybrid disk. CD-R and CD-RW discs ⢠CD-R/CD-RW discs that have not been sub- ject to the âÂÂfinalize processâ (a process that allows them to be played back on a conven- tional CD player) can not be played back. ⢠It may not be possible to play back CD-R/CD- RW discs recorded on a music CD recorder or a personal computer because of disc charac- teristics, scratches or dirt on the disc, or dirt, condensation, etc. on the lens of this unit. ⢠Playback of discs recorded on a personal computer may not be possible depending on the application settings and the environment. Please record with the correct format. (For details, contact the manufacturer of the appli- cation.) ⢠Playback of CD-R/CD-RW discs may become impossible in case of direct exposure to sun- light, high temperatures, or the storage condi- tions in the car. ⢠Titles and other text information recorded on a CD-R/CD-RW disc may not be displayed by this product (in the case of audio data (CD- DA)). ⢠This product conforms to the track skip func- tion of the CD-R/CD-RW disc. The tracks con- taining the track skip information are skipped over automatically (in the case of audio data (CD-DA)). ⢠If you insert a CD-RW disc into this product, load time to playback will be longer than for a conventional CD or CD-R disc. ⢠Read the precautions accompanying the CD- R/CD-RW discs before use. ⢠Recordings on CD-R/CD-RW can not be played back using the DDCD (Double Density CD) system. 70 ENGLISH ESPAÃÂOL DEUTSCH FRANÃÂAIS ITALIANO NEDERLANDS
71 Additional Information MP3 files ⢠MP3 is short for MPEG Audio Layer 3 and refers to an audio compression technology standard. ⢠This product allows playback of MP3 files on CD-ROM, CD-R and CD-RW discs. Disc recordings compatible with ISO9660 level 1 and level 2 can be played back. Correspondence to extended format is made with the following conditions. Joliet: Correspondence only to the 8.3 format. Romeo: Correspondence to folder names with up to 64 characters and file names with up to 63 characters (including the extension). ⢠Discs that have been recorded in multiple recording sessions are replayed in their first session form only. ⢠Files are compatible with the ID3 Tag Ver. 1.0 and Ver. 1.1 formats for display of album (disc title), track (track title) and artist (track artist). ⢠Only when MP3 files of 32, 44.1 and 48 kHz frequencies are played back, the emphasis function is valid. (22.05, 24, 32, 44.1, 48 kHz sampling frequencies can be played back.) ⢠MP3 files are not compatible with packet write data transfer. ⢠There is no m3u playlist compatibility. ⢠There is no compatibility with the MP3i (MP3 interactive) or mp3PRO format. Precaution: ⢠When naming an MP3 file, add the corresponding filename extension (.mp3). ⢠This product plays back files with the filename extension (.mp3) as an MP3 file. To prevent noise and malfunctions, do not use this extension for files other than MP3 files. About folders and MP3 files ⢠An outline of a CD-ROM with MP3 files on it is shown below. Subfolders are shown as fold- ers in the folder currently selected. (In the case shown, 01S is a subfolder of the 01 fold- er.) Note: ⢠The elapsed playback time for the data track of a Mixed Mode CD will be displayed, but no sound will be output. Only music tracks will be played back. ⢠It is not possible to check folders that do not include MP3 files. ⢠MP3 files in up to 8 tiers of folders can be played back. However, there is a delay in the start of play- back on discs with numerous tiers. For this reason we recommend creating discs with no more than 2 tiers. First Second Third level level level
âÂÂM emor y Stickâ player and care ⢠Use only âÂÂMemory Stickâ (âÂÂMagicGate Memory StickâÂÂ) with the mark shown below. ⢠âÂÂMemory Stickâ with the following mark can not be used. ⢠The maximum storage capacity of the âÂÂMG Memory Stickâ compatible with this product is 128 MB. ⢠When the erasure prevention switch is set to LOCK, you can not record, edit or erase. ⢠Do not touch the terminals with your fingers or metal objects. ⢠Do not remove the âÂÂMemory Stickâ while writ- ing (when the access lamp is lights), as this could damage data. ⢠Do not place the âÂÂMemory Stickâ in a place where it may be subject to static or electrical noise, as this can damage data. ⢠The âÂÂMemory Stickâ should be formatted by using this product or the formatting device for the âÂÂMG Memory StickâÂÂ. If the âÂÂMemory Stickâ is formatted with Windows Explorer, data can not be played back on this product. ⢠Store the âÂÂMemory Stickâ away from direct sunlight and high temperatures. ⢠Keep the âÂÂMemory Stickâ away from the source of magnetic interference, such as TVs or audio speakers. ⢠Keep the âÂÂMemory Stickâ in its case. ⢠Paste each âÂÂMemory Stickâ label to a proper location. You may be unable to eject a âÂÂMemory Stickâ if its label is pasted in layer or to a wrong location. ⢠Do not use the âÂÂMemory Stickâ whose label is partially unstuck or floated. Replace such label before using the âÂÂMemory StickâÂÂ, other- wise the label may be caught midway to pre- vent the âÂÂMemory Stickâ from being ejected. ⢠If the surface of the âÂÂMemory Stickâ is tainted, wipe it with clean soft cloth. ⢠Do not apply volatile chemicals such as ben- zine or thinner to the âÂÂMemory StickâÂÂ. 72 ENGLISH ESPAÃÂOL DEUTSCH FRANÃÂAIS ITALIANO NEDERLANDS
73 Additional Information U nderstanding auto-equalizing error messages When correct measurement of car interior acoustic characteristics is not possible using the auto- equalizer, an error message may appear on the display. If an error message appears on the display, refer to the table below to see what the problem is and the suggested method of correcting the prob- lem. After checking, try again. Display Cause Remedy ERROR CHECK MIC Microphone is not connected. Plug the supplied microphone securely into the jack. ERROR CHECK SPEAKER The microphone cannot pick Confirm that the speakers are up the measuring tone of the connected correctly. front and rear speakers. Correct the input level setting of the power amp connected to the speakers. Set the microphone correctly. ERROR CHECK SYSTEM The surrounding noise level Stop your car in a place that is as is too high. quite as possible, and switch off the engine, air conditioner or heater. Set the microphone correctly.
U nderstanding built-in CD player error messages When problems occur during CD play, an error message may appear on the display. If an error mes- sage appears on the display, refer to the table below to see what the problem is and the suggested method of correcting the problem. If the error cannot be corrected, contact your dealer or your near- est Pioneer service center. Display Cause Remedy ERROR- 00, 44 All tracks are skip tracks. Replace disc. ERROR- 11, 12, 17, 30 Dirty disc. Clean disc. ERROR- 11, 12, 17, 30 Scratched disc. Replace disc. ERROR- 12, 17 Unrecorded disc. Check the disc. ERROR- 10, 11, 12, 17, Electrical or mechanical Turn the car ignition ON and OFF, 30, A0, B0 problem. or switch to a different source, then switch back to the CD player. ERROR- 23 The CD format cannot be Replace disc. played back. CanâÂÂt play MP3 file cannot be played Switch to other MP3 file. back. HEAT CD player overheated. Turn off the CD player and wait until the CD player cools down. No audio Nothing has been recorded Replace disc. or the CD format cannot be played back. 74 ENGLISH ESPAÃÂOL DEUTSCH FRANÃÂAIS ITALIANO NEDERLANDS
75 Additional Information U nderstanding music ser ver error messages Display Cause Remedy ERROR- 23 SERVER ERROR- 23 ERROR- 24 SERVER ERROR- 24 ERROR- 30, A0, A1, B0 SERVER ERROR- 30, A0, A1, B0 Can âÂÂt play Expired No audio No PlayList SERVER READ ERROR SERVER WRITE ERROR TEMP Music serverâÂÂs hard disc mal- function. Music server malfunction (due to damaged data, etc.) Electrical or mechanical prob- lem. The music data cannot be played back. The music data has exceeded the playback limit (playback time or number of plays). No recording on music server. No playlist file for music data that can be played back in selected playlist mode. Somehow track information was not read in correctly. There is something wrong with the music server. Somehow track information or FAT was not written correctly. Abnormal temperature inside this product. Repeat operation. Turn the car iginition ON and OFF, or switch to a different source, then switch back to the music server. Turn the car iginition ON and OFF, or switch to a different source, then switch back to the music server. Switch to other music data. Switch to other music data. Record tracks on music server. Switch to other playlist mode. Turn the car iginition ON and OFF, or switch to a different source, then switch back to the music server. Repeat operation. Wait until normal operating temper- ature is restored.
U nderstanding music ser ver error messages when recording Display Cause Remedy ERROR- 56 ERROR- 59 ERROR- 5A ERROR- 5B ERROR- 5- CanâÂÂt copy CD-ROM Defect M.Server full No disc NO SIGNAL PlayList full Retry SERVER READ ERR SERVER WRITE ERR TEMP Continued overleaf. 76 ENGLISH ESPAÃÂOL DEUTSCH FRANÃÂAIS ITALIANO NEDERLANDS Select another track. Erase unwanted playlist files for digital recordings. Erase unwanted playlist files for analog recordings. Erase unwanted artist playlist files. Erase unwanted playlist files for each recording date. Replace a disc that can be copied (a regular CD). Replace a music CD. Clean disc. Erase unwanted tracks. Insert disc. Turn the car ignition OFF and then ON, or press RESET button. Erase unwanted playlist files. Clean disc. Repeat operation. Repeat operation. Wait until the temperature of this unit rises. Wait until normal operating temper- ature is restored. SDMI contravention. You have tried to record more playlist files for digital record- ings than the music server can manage. You have tried to record more playlist files for analog record- ings than the music server can manage. You have tried to record more artist playlist files than the music server can manage. You have tried to record more playlist files for each recording date than the music server can manage. Trying to copy from a copy pro- tect disc including CD-R Trying to copy from a CD- ROM. CD skips three times at same place. Insufficient space to record on music server. No disc is set in this product. You can not enter digital sig- nals into the music server. You have tried to record more playlist files than the music server can manage. The CD skips. Somehow track information was not read in correctly. Somehow track information or FAT was not written correctly. Recording is not possible because of low temperature. Abnormal temperature inside this product.
77 Additional Information Display Cause Remedy Time short TOC ERR Track full Note: ⢠Should any other error messages appear, refer to âÂÂUnderstanding music server error messagesâ on page 75. ⢠The TOC (Table of Contents) consists of information other than the audio signalâÂÂsuch as the number of recorded tracks, playing time and titleâÂÂon CD and MD discs, etc. ⢠The FAT (File Allocation Table) defines the parameters for managing music data and playlist files on the music server and âÂÂMemory StickâÂÂ, etc. U nderstanding âÂÂMemor y Stickâ player error messages Display Cause Remedy ERROR- 24 STICK ERROR- 24 ERROR- 27 STICK ERROR- 27 ERROR- 30, A0, A1, B0 STICK ERROR- 30, A0, A1, B0 ERROR- 55 STICK WRITE ERROR CanâÂÂt play WARNING- 14 Expired FORMAT ERROR There is something wrong with the âÂÂMemory StickâÂÂ. The âÂÂMemory Stickâ has been inserted upside-down or back- to-front. Electrical or mechanical prob- lem. Somehow the track information was not written correctly. The music data cannot be played back. The music data has exceeded the playback limit (playback time or number of plays). A âÂÂMemory Stickâ other than an âÂÂMG Memory Stickâ is inserted. A âÂÂMemory Stickâ formatted in such a way as to be unable to be played back in this product is inserted (such as a âÂÂMemory Stickâ formatted on a PC). Replace the âÂÂMemory StickâÂÂ. Remove âÂÂMemory StickâÂÂ, align cor- rectly and reinsert. If message reappears, replace the âÂÂMemory StickâÂÂ. Turn the car ignition ON and OFF, or switch to a different source, then switch back to the âÂÂMemory Stickâ player. Repeat operation. If message reappears, replace the âÂÂMemory StickâÂÂ. Switch to other music data. Switch to other music data. Replace the âÂÂMG Memory StickâÂÂ. Remove the âÂÂMemory Stickâ and insert it again. If message reap- pears, replace the âÂÂMemory StickâÂÂ. The time remaining on the music server is shorter than the disc or tracks to be record- ed. The CDâÂÂs TOC is unreadable. You try to record more than 400 tracks in a single playlist file. Erase unwanted tracks. Replace disc. Cancel record standby.
Display Cause Remedy MS Locked Protected No audio No Stick Stick full STICK READ ERROR WARNING- 16 78 ENGLISH ESPAÃÂOL DEUTSCH FRANÃÂAIS ITALIANO NEDERLANDS The erasure prevention switch is set to LOCK. A âÂÂMG Memory Stickâ with no music data on it has been inserted, or a âÂÂMemory Stickâ other than a âÂÂMG Memory Stickâ has been inserted. The âÂÂMemory Stickâ is not inserted. There is insufficient empty space on the âÂÂMemory StickâÂÂ. Somehow track information was not read in correctly. There is something wrong with the âÂÂMemory StickâÂÂ. There is no playback permis- sion for music data procured by electronic distribution, such as over the Internet. Cancel the erasure prevention switch. Insert a âÂÂMG Memory Stickâ with music data on it. Insert the âÂÂMemory Stick.â Replace the âÂÂMemory Stickâ or erase unwanted music data. Remove the âÂÂMemory Stickâ and insert it again. If message reap- pears, replace the âÂÂMemory StickâÂÂ. Switch to other music data.
79 Additional Information T erms A TRAC3 Short for âÂÂAdaptive Transform Acoustic Coding3âÂÂ. This is an audio compression tech- nology for high-quality and high compression. It is possible to compress music data to about 1/10th the level of a CD, allowing miniaturiza- tion of storage media. Bit rate This expresses data volume per second, or bps units (bits per second). The higher the rate, the more information is available to reproduce the sound. Using the same encoding method (such as ATRAC3), the higher the rate, the better the sound. (As different encoding methods are use for MP3 and ATRAC3, a simple comparison is impossible.) ID3 T ag This is a method of embedding track-related information in a MP3 file. This embedded infor- mation can include the track title, the artistâÂÂs name, the album title, the music genre, the year of production, comments and other data. The contents can be freely edited using software with ID3 Tag editing functions. Although the tags are restricted to the number of characters, the information can be viewed when the track is played back. ISO9660 format This is the international standard for the format logic of CD-ROM folders and files. For the ISO9660 format, there are regulations for the following two levels. Level 1: The file name is in 8.3 format (the name con- sists of up to 8 characters, half-byte English capital letters and half-byte numerals and the âÂÂ_â sign, with a file-extension of three charac- ters.) Level 2: The file name can have up to 31 characters (including the separation mark âÂÂ.â and a file extension). Each folder contains less than 8 hierarchies. Extended formats Joliet: File names can have up to 64 characters. Romeo: File names can have up to 128 characters. m3u Playlists created using the âÂÂWINAMPâ software have a playlist file extension (.m3u). MagicGate Data recorded on a âÂÂMagicGate Memory Stick (MG Memory Stick)â is encrypted using copy- right protection technology and can be mutually authenticated with âÂÂMG Memory Stickâ compati- ble equipment. A âÂÂMG Memory Stickâ can only be used to record and playback when there is verification between the âÂÂMG Memory Stickâ and the compatible equipment. âÂÂMagicGate Memor y Stickâ This is the name used for a âÂÂMemory Stickâ that uses the âÂÂMagicGateâ copyright protection tech- nology. This is an IC recording media for recording and playback of music and other data requiring copyright protection technology.
âÂÂMemor y Stickâ This is a compact, light-weight IC recording medium. The âÂÂMemory Stickâ is a regular âÂÂMemory Stickâ without the copyright protection technology used in the âÂÂMagicGate Memory Stick.â The âÂÂMemory Stickâ can be used to record image and audio data, etc. with âÂÂMemory Stickâ compatible equipment. Different types of data can be recorded on a single âÂÂMemory Stick.â MP3 MP3 is short for MPEG Audio Layer3. It is an audio compression standard set by a working group (MPEG) of the ISO (International Standards Organization). MP3 is able to com- press audio data to about 1/10th the level of a conventional disc. Multi-session Multi-session is a recording method that allows additional data to be recorded later. When recording data on a CD-ROM, CD-R or CD-RW, etc., all data from beginning to end is treated as a single unit or session. Multi-session is a method of recording more than 2 sessions in one disc. Packet write This is a general term for a method of writing on CD-R, etc. at the time required for a file, just as is done with files on floppy or hard discs. SCMS SCMS is short for Serial Copy Management System. This is a serial copy management sys- tem developed to stop serial copying (copying of copies) of music, including copying of music recorded digitally from CDs etc. to a hard disk (music server). SDMI SDMI is short for Secure Digital Music Initiative. In order to develop a uniform system of copy- right protection technology that can be used around the world, more than about 130 compa- nies and organization representing the record- ing, computer and consumer electronics indus- tries have created a form. The objective is to prevent illegal use of music data and to pro- mote the development of legitimate music distri- bution services. The âÂÂMagicGateâ copyright pro- tection technology is standard based on SDMI regulations. VBR VBR is short for Variable Bit Rate. Generally speaking CBR (Constant Bit Rate) is more widely used. But to flexibly adjust the bit rate according to the needs of audio compression, it is possible to achieve compression priorities sound quality. 80 ENGLISH ESPAÃÂOL DEUTSCH FRANÃÂAIS ITALIANO NEDERLANDS
81 Additional Information S pecifications General Power source .............. 14.4 V DC (10.8 â 15.1 V allowable) Grounding system .......................................... Negative type Max. current consumption ........................................ 10.0 A Dimensions (DIN) (chassis) ...... 178 (W) à50 (H) à155 (D) mm [7 (W) à2 (H) à6-1/8 (D) in.] (nose) ............ 188 (W) à58 (H) à37 (D) mm [7-3/8 (W) à2-1/4 (H) à1-1/2 (D) in.] (D) (chassis) ...... 178 (W) à50 (H) à160 (D) mm [7 (W) à2 (H) à6-1/4 (D) in.] (nose) ............ 170 (W) à46 (H) à32 (D) mm [6-3/4 (W) à1-3/4 (H) à1-1/4 (D) in.] Weight (main body) ........................................ 1.9 kg (4.2 lbs.) (power box) ...................................................... 0.2 kg Audio/DSP Continuous power output is 22 W per channel min. into 4 ohms, both channels driven 50 to 15,000 Hz with no more than 5% THD. Maximum power output ...................................... 50 W à4 Load impedance ............................ 4 ⦠(4 â 8 ⦠allowable) Preout maximum output level/ output impedance ...................................... 2.2 V/1 k ⦠Loudness contour ........ 10 dB (100 Hz), 6.5 dB (10 kHz) (volume: âÂÂ30 dB) Equalizer (13-Band Graphic Equalizer) Frequency .................. 50/80/125/200/315/500/800 Hz 1.25/2/3.15/5/8/12.5 kHz Equalization range ................................ ñ12 dB (2 dB) Auto Equalizer (Front & Rear & Subwoofer 13-Band Graphic) Frequency .................. 50/80/125/200/315/500/800 Hz 1.25/2/3.15/5/8/12.5 kHz Equalization range ...................... 6 â âÂÂ12 dB (2 dB) Network HPF (Front/Rear) Frequency .......................... 50/63/80/100/125 Hz Slope ................................................ âÂÂ12 dB/oct. Subwoofer output Frequency .......................... 50/63/80/100/125 Hz Slope ................................................ âÂÂ18 dB/oct. Gain .............................. âÂÂ24 dB â 6 dB (1 dB) Phase ........................................ Normal/Reverse CD player System .................................... Compact disc audio system Usable discs .................................................. Compact disc Signal format ...................... Sampling frequency: 44.1 kHz Number of quantization bits: 16; linear Frequency characteristics ................ 5 â 20,000 Hz ( ñ1 dB) Signal-to-noise ratio ............ 94 dB (1 kHz) (IHF-A network) Dynamic range .............................................. 92 dB (1 kHz) MP3 decoding ................................ MPEG 1 Audio Layer 3 Number of channels ............................................ 2 (stereo) HDD HDD quantity ............................................................ 10 GB Codec .................................................................... ATRAC3 Frequency characteristics .............. 20 â 20,000 Hz (ñ1 dB) Average seek time ................................................ 13 msec. âÂÂMemor y Stickâ player Type ............................................ MagicGate Memory Stick Decording .............................................................. ATRAC3 Frequency characteristics .............. 20 â 20,000 Hz (ñ1 dB)
FM tuner Frequency range ...................................... 87.9 â 107.9 MHz Usable sensitivity ........................................................ 9 dBf (0.8 õ V/75 â¦, mono, S/N: 30 dB) 50 dB quieting sensitivity ...... 15 dBf (1.5 õ V/75 ⦠, mono) Signal-to-noise ratio ........................ 70 dB (IHF-A network) Distortion ............................ 0.3% (at 65 dBf, 1 kHz, stereo) Frequency response ...................... 30 â 15,000 Hz (ñ3 dB) Stereo separation .......................... 40 dB (at 65 dBf, 1 kHz) Selectivity ...................................................... 70 dB (2ACA) Three-signal intermodulation (desired signal level) ........................................ 30 dBf (two undesired signal level: 100 dBf) AM tuner Frequency range ......................... 530 â 1,710 kHz (10 kHz) Usable sensitivity .................................. 18 õV (S/N: 20 dB) Selectivity .................................................. 50 dB (ñ10 kHz) Note: ⢠Specifications and design are subject to modifica- tion without notice for the sake of improvements. 82 ENGLISH ESPAÃÂOL DEUTSCH FRANÃÂAIS ITALIANO NEDERLANDS
PIONEER CORPORATION 4-1, MEGURO 1-CHOME, MEGURO-KU, TOKYO 153-8654, JAPAN PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC. P.O. Box 1540, Long Beach, California 90801-1540, U.S.A. TEL: (800) 421-1404 PIONEER EUROPE NV Haven 1087, Keetberglaan 1, B-9120 Melsele, Belgium TEL: (0) 3/570.05.11 PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIACENTRE PTE. LTD. 253 Alexandra Road, #04-01, Singapore 159936 TEL: 65-472-1111 PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD. 178-184 Boundary Road, Braeside, Victoria 3195, Australia TEL: (03) 9586-6300 PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC. 300 Allstate Parkway, Markham, Ontario L3R OP2, Canada TEL: (905) 479-4411 PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO, S.A. de C.V. San Lorenzo 1009 3er. Piso Desp. 302 Col. Del Valle Mexico, D.F. C.P. 03100 TEL: 5-688-52-90 Published by Pioneer Corporation. Copyright é 2001 by Pioneer Corporation. All rights reserved. Publication de Pioneer Corporation. Copyright é 2001 Pioneer Corporation. Tous droits de reproduction et de traduction réservés. Printed in Japan Imprimé au Japon <CRD3472-B> UC <KMMUF/01K00001>
DEH-P90HDD Printed in Japan Imprimé au Japon <CRD3473-A> UC This product conforms to CEMA cord colors. Le code de couleur des câbles utilisé pour ce produit est conforme àCEMA. INST ALLA TION MANUAL MANUEL DâÂÂINST ALLA TION <KMMUF/01K00000> Fig. 2 Y ellow/black If you use a cellular telephone, connect it via the Audio Mute lead on the cellular telephone. If not, keep the Audio Mute lead free of any connections. Y ellow T o terminal always supplied with power regardless of ignition switch position. Red T o electric terminal controlled by ignition switch (12 V DC) ON/OFF . Fuse holder Fuse resistor Fuse resistor Orange/white T o lighting switch terminal. Black (ground) T o vehicle (metal) body. Connecting cords with RCA pin plugs (sold separately) Power amp (sold separately) Blue/white T o system control terminal of the power amp or Auto- antenna relay control terminal (max. 300 mA 12 V DC). System remote control Front speaker White White/black Gray Gray/black Left Right Rear speaker Green Green/black V iolet V iolet/black Subwoofer With a 2 speaker system, do not connect anything to the speaker leads that are not connected to speakers. Perform these connections when using a different amp (sold separately). Antenna jack 15 cm (5/8 inch) This Product Subwoofer output (SUBWOOFER OUTPUT) Rear output (REAR OUTPUT) Front output (FRONT OUTPUT) IP-BUS input (Blue) Multi-CD player (sold separately) IP-BUS cable Power box Power box cord 1 m (3-7/8 inch) Power amp (sold separately) Power amp (sold separately) Front speaker Front speaker Front speaker Rear speaker Rear speaker Rear speaker Subwoofer 1 m (3-7/8 inch) 15 cm (5/8 inch) 15 cm (5/8 inch) â â â â â â â â â â Auto-equalizing mike jack Pull the auto-equalizing mike jack out of the console box, so that the mike can be plugged in or pulled out even after this unit has been installed. Install the power box cord securely so that the cord can not be easily pulled out. Note: ⢠This unit is for vehicles with a 12-volt battery and negative grounding. Before installing it in a recre- ational vehicle, truck, or bus, check the battery voltage. ⢠To avoid shorts in the electrical system, be sure to disconnect the â battery cable before beginning installation. ⢠Refer to the ownerâÂÂs manual for details on con- necting the power amp and other units, then make connections correctly. ⢠Secure the wiring with cable clamps or adhesive tape. To protect the wiring, wrap adhesive tape around them where they lie against metal parts. ⢠Route and secure all wiring so it cannot touch any moving parts, such as the gear shift, handbrake, and seat rails. Do not route wiring in places that get hot, such as near the heater outlet. If the insula- tion of the wiring melts or gets torn, there is a dan- ger of the wiring short-circuiting to the vehicle body. ⢠DonâÂÂt pass the yellow lead through a hole into the engine compartment to connect to the battery. This will damage the lead insulation and cause a very dangerous short. ⢠Do not shorten any leads. If you do, the protection circuit may fail to work when it should. ⢠Never feed power to other equipment by cutting the insulation of the power supply lead of the unit and tapping into the lead. The current capacity of the lead will be exceeded, causing overheating. ⢠When replacing fuse, be sure to use only fuse of the rating prescribed on the fuse holder. ⢠Since a unique BPTL circuit is employed, never wire so the speaker leads are directly grounded or the left and right â speaker leads are common. ⢠If the RCA pin jack on the unit will not be used, do not remove the caps attached to the end of the con- nector. ⢠Speakers connected to this unit must be high- power types with minimum rating of 50 W and impedance of 4 to 8 ohms. Connecting speakers with output and/or impedance values other than those noted here may result in the speakers catch- ing fire, emitting smoke, or becoming damaged. ⢠When this productâÂÂs source is switched ON, a con- trol signal is output through the blue/white lead. Connect to an external power ampâÂÂs system remote control or the carâÂÂs Auto-antenna relay control ter- minal (max. 300 mA 12 V DC). If the car features a glass antenna, connect to the antenna booster power supply terminal. ⢠When an external power amp is being used with this system, be sure not to connect the blue/white lead to the ampâÂÂs power terminal. Likewise, do not connect the blue/white lead to the power terminal of the auto-antenna. Such connection could cause excessive current drain and malfunction. ⢠To avoid short-circuiting, cover the disconnected lead with insulating tape. Especially, insulate the unused speaker leads without fail. There is a possi- bility of short-circuiting if the leads are not insulat- ed. ⢠To prevent incorrect connection, the input side of the IP-BUS connector is blue, and the output side is black. Connect the connectors of the same colors correctly. ⢠If this unit is installed in a vehicle that does not have an ACC (accessory) position on the ignition switch, the red lead of the unit should be connected to a terminal coupled with ignition switch ON/OFF operations. If this is not done, the vehicle battery may be drained when you are away from the vehi- cle for several hours. (Fig. 1) Fig. 1 ⢠The black lead is ground. Please ground this lead separately from the ground of high-current prod- ucts such as power amps. If you ground the products together and the ground becomes detached, there is a risk of damage to the products or fire. No ACC position ACC position O N S T A R T O F F A C C O N S T A R T O F F DEH-P90HDD Printed in Japan Imprimé au Japon <CRD3473-A> UC Connecting the Units <ENGLISH> This product conforms to CEMA cord colors. Le code de couleur des câbles utilisé pour ce produit est conforme àCEMA. ⢠Cords for this product and those for other prod- ucts may be different colors even if they have the same function. When connecting this product to another product, refer to the supplied Installation manuals of both products and connect cords that have the same function. INST ALLA TION MANUAL MANUEL DâÂÂINST ALLA TION <KMMUF/01K00000>
DEH-P90HDD Printed in Japan Imprimé au Japon <CRD3473-A> UC This product conforms to CEMA cord colors. Le code de couleur des câbles utilisé pour ce produit est conforme àCEMA. INST ALLA TION MANUAL MANUEL DâÂÂINST ALLA TION <KMMUF/01K00000> Fig. 2 Y ellow/black If you use a cellular telephone, connect it via the Audio Mute lead on the cellular telephone. If not, keep the Audio Mute lead free of any connections. Y ellow T o terminal always supplied with power regardless of ignition switch position. Red T o electric terminal controlled by ignition switch (12 V DC) ON/OFF . Fuse holder Fuse resistor Fuse resistor Orange/white T o lighting switch terminal. Black (ground) T o vehicle (metal) body. Connecting cords with RCA pin plugs (sold separately) Power amp (sold separately) Blue/white T o system control terminal of the power amp or Auto- antenna relay control terminal (max. 300 mA 12 V DC). System remote control Front speaker White White/black Gray Gray/black Left Right Rear speaker Green Green/black V iolet V iolet/black Subwoofer With a 2 speaker system, do not connect anything to the speaker leads that are not connected to speakers. Perform these connections when using a different amp (sold separately). Antenna jack 15 cm (5/8 inch) This Product Subwoofer output (SUBWOOFER OUTPUT) Rear output (REAR OUTPUT) Front output (FRONT OUTPUT) IP-BUS input (Blue) Multi-CD player (sold separately) IP-BUS cable Power box Power box cord 1 m (3-7/8 inch) Power amp (sold separately) Power amp (sold separately) Front speaker Front speaker Front speaker Rear speaker Rear speaker Rear speaker Subwoofer 1 m (3-7/8 inch) 15 cm (5/8 inch) 15 cm (5/8 inch) â â â â â â â â â â Auto-equalizing mike jack Pull the auto-equalizing mike jack out of the console box, so that the mike can be plugged in or pulled out even after this unit has been installed. Install the power box cord securely so that the cord can not be easily pulled out. Note: ⢠This unit is for vehicles with a 12-volt battery and negative grounding. Before installing it in a recre- ational vehicle, truck, or bus, check the battery voltage. ⢠To avoid shorts in the electrical system, be sure to disconnect the â battery cable before beginning installation. ⢠Refer to the ownerâÂÂs manual for details on con- necting the power amp and other units, then make connections correctly. ⢠Secure the wiring with cable clamps or adhesive tape. To protect the wiring, wrap adhesive tape around them where they lie against metal parts. ⢠Route and secure all wiring so it cannot touch any moving parts, such as the gear shift, handbrake, and seat rails. Do not route wiring in places that get hot, such as near the heater outlet. If the insula- tion of the wiring melts or gets torn, there is a dan- ger of the wiring short-circuiting to the vehicle body. ⢠DonâÂÂt pass the yellow lead through a hole into the engine compartment to connect to the battery. This will damage the lead insulation and cause a very dangerous short. ⢠Do not shorten any leads. If you do, the protection circuit may fail to work when it should. ⢠Never feed power to other equipment by cutting the insulation of the power supply lead of the unit and tapping into the lead. The current capacity of the lead will be exceeded, causing overheating. ⢠When replacing fuse, be sure to use only fuse of the rating prescribed on the fuse holder. ⢠Since a unique BPTL circuit is employed, never wire so the speaker leads are directly grounded or the left and right â speaker leads are common. ⢠If the RCA pin jack on the unit will not be used, do not remove the caps attached to the end of the con- nector. ⢠Speakers connected to this unit must be high- power types with minimum rating of 50 W and impedance of 4 to 8 ohms. Connecting speakers with output and/or impedance values other than those noted here may result in the speakers catch- ing fire, emitting smoke, or becoming damaged. ⢠When this productâÂÂs source is switched ON, a con- trol signal is output through the blue/white lead. Connect to an external power ampâÂÂs system remote control or the carâÂÂs Auto-antenna relay control ter- minal (max. 300 mA 12 V DC). If the car features a glass antenna, connect to the antenna booster power supply terminal. ⢠When an external power amp is being used with this system, be sure not to connect the blue/white lead to the ampâÂÂs power terminal. Likewise, do not connect the blue/white lead to the power terminal of the auto-antenna. Such connection could cause excessive current drain and malfunction. ⢠To avoid short-circuiting, cover the disconnected lead with insulating tape. Especially, insulate the unused speaker leads without fail. There is a possi- bility of short-circuiting if the leads are not insulat- ed. ⢠To prevent incorrect connection, the input side of the IP-BUS connector is blue, and the output side is black. Connect the connectors of the same colors correctly. ⢠If this unit is installed in a vehicle that does not have an ACC (accessory) position on the ignition switch, the red lead of the unit should be connected to a terminal coupled with ignition switch ON/OFF operations. If this is not done, the vehicle battery may be drained when you are away from the vehi- cle for several hours. (Fig. 1) Fig. 1 ⢠The black lead is ground. Please ground this lead separately from the ground of high-current prod- ucts such as power amps. If you ground the products together and the ground becomes detached, there is a risk of damage to the products or fire. No ACC position ACC position O N S T A R T O F F A C C O N S T A R T O F F DEH-P90HDD Printed in Japan Imprimé au Japon <CRD3473-A> UC Connecting the Units <ENGLISH> This product conforms to CEMA cord colors. Le code de couleur des câbles utilisé pour ce produit est conforme àCEMA. ⢠Cords for this product and those for other prod- ucts may be different colors even if they have the same function. When connecting this product to another product, refer to the supplied Installation manuals of both products and connect cords that have the same function. INST ALLA TION MANUAL MANUEL DâÂÂINST ALLA TION <KMMUF/01K00000>
A T itle (English) Installation without the rubber bush (Fig. 6) Fig. 6 Removing the Unit (Fig. 7) (Fig. 8) Fig. 7 Fig. 8 Nut (5 mm) Dashboard Drill a 5.5 â 6.0 mm diameter hole. Screw (5 à16 mm) Nut (5 mm) Screw Strap Be sure to use the strap to secure the back of the unit in place. The strap can be bent by hand to the desired angle. Insert the release pin into the hole in the bottom of the frame and pull out to remove the frame. (When reattaching the frame, point the side with a groove downwards and attach it.) Frame Insert the supplied extraction keys into the unit, as shown in the figure, until they click into place. Keeping the keys pressed against the sides of the unit, pull the unit out. Installation <ENGLISH> Note: ⢠Before finally installing the unit, connect the wiring temporarily, making sure it is all connected up properly, and the unit and the system work properly. ⢠Use only the parts included with the unit to ensure proper installation. The use of unauthorized parts can cause malfunctions. ⢠Consult with your nearest dealer if installation requires the drilling of holes or other modifications of the vehicle. ⢠Install the unit where it does not get in the driverâÂÂs way and cannot injure the passenger if there is a sudden stop, like an emergency stop. ⢠The semiconductor laser will be damaged if it overheats, so donâÂÂt install the unit anywhere hot â for instance, near a heater outlet. ⢠If installation angle exceeds 30ð from horizontal, the unit might not give its optimum performance. (Fig. 3) Fig. 3 ⢠This unit and the GPS antenna of the navigation unit should be set as far apart as possible. If they are too close, this unit and the navigation unit may not operate correctly. ⢠Do not install the power box near doors where rainwater could splash onto it. ⢠As the power box can heat up, it should never be installed in the following locations: â where it could come into contact with car wiring or equipment â where it would easily come into contact with passengers. ⢠This unit must be installed after pulling the auto- equalizing mike jack out of the console box, so that the mike can be plugged in or pulled out even after this unit has been installed. ⢠The cords must not cover up the area shown in Fig. 2. This is so the amplifiers can radiate freely. Fig. 4 Do not close this area. 30 ð DIN Front/Rear -mount This unit can be properly installed either from âÂÂFrontâ (conventional DIN Front-mount) or âÂÂRearâ (DIN Rear-mount installation, utilizing threaded screw holes at the sides of unit chassis). For details, refer to the following illustrated installation methods. DIN Front-mount Installation with the rubber bush (Fig. 5) Fig. 5 Holder After inserting the holder into the dash- board, then select the appropriate tabs according to the thickness of the dash- board material and bend them. (Install as firmly as possible using the top and bottom tabs. T o secure, bend the tabs 90 degrees.) 182 53 Rubber bush Screw Dashboard DIN Rear -mount Installation using the screw holes on the side of the unit 1. Remove the frame. (Fig. 9) Fig. 9 2. Fastening the unit to the factory radio mounting bracket. (Fig. 10) (Fig. 11) Select a position where the screw holes of the bracket and the screw holes of the head unit become aligned (are fitted), and tighten the screws at 2 places on each side. Use either binding screws (5 à8 mm) or flush surface screws (5 à8 mm), depending on the shape of the screw holes in the bracket . Fig. 10 Fig. 11 Frame Insert the release pin into the hole in the bottom of the frame and pull out to remove the frame. (When reattaching the frame, point the side with a groove downwards and attach it.) Screw Dashboard or Console Factory radio mounting bracket
A T itle (English) Installation without the rubber bush (Fig. 6) Fig. 6 Removing the Unit (Fig. 7) (Fig. 8) Fig. 7 Fig. 8 Nut (5 mm) Dashboard Drill a 5.5 â 6.0 mm diameter hole. Screw (5 à16 mm) Nut (5 mm) Screw Strap Be sure to use the strap to secure the back of the unit in place. The strap can be bent by hand to the desired angle. Insert the release pin into the hole in the bottom of the frame and pull out to remove the frame. (When reattaching the frame, point the side with a groove downwards and attach it.) Frame Insert the supplied extraction keys into the unit, as shown in the figure, until they click into place. Keeping the keys pressed against the sides of the unit, pull the unit out. Installation <ENGLISH> Note: ⢠Before finally installing the unit, connect the wiring temporarily, making sure it is all connected up properly, and the unit and the system work properly. ⢠Use only the parts included with the unit to ensure proper installation. The use of unauthorized parts can cause malfunctions. ⢠Consult with your nearest dealer if installation requires the drilling of holes or other modifications of the vehicle. ⢠Install the unit where it does not get in the driverâÂÂs way and cannot injure the passenger if there is a sudden stop, like an emergency stop. ⢠The semiconductor laser will be damaged if it overheats, so donâÂÂt install the unit anywhere hot â for instance, near a heater outlet. ⢠If installation angle exceeds 30ð from horizontal, the unit might not give its optimum performance. (Fig. 3) Fig. 3 ⢠This unit and the GPS antenna of the navigation unit should be set as far apart as possible. If they are too close, this unit and the navigation unit may not operate correctly. ⢠Do not install the power box near doors where rainwater could splash onto it. ⢠As the power box can heat up, it should never be installed in the following locations: â where it could come into contact with car wiring or equipment â where it would easily come into contact with passengers. ⢠This unit must be installed after pulling the auto- equalizing mike jack out of the console box, so that the mike can be plugged in or pulled out even after this unit has been installed. ⢠The cords must not cover up the area shown in Fig. 2. This is so the amplifiers can radiate freely. Fig. 4 Do not close this area. 30 ð DIN Front/Rear -mount This unit can be properly installed either from âÂÂFrontâ (conventional DIN Front-mount) or âÂÂRearâ (DIN Rear-mount installation, utilizing threaded screw holes at the sides of unit chassis). For details, refer to the following illustrated installation methods. DIN Front-mount Installation with the rubber bush (Fig. 5) Fig. 5 Holder After inserting the holder into the dash- board, then select the appropriate tabs according to the thickness of the dash- board material and bend them. (Install as firmly as possible using the top and bottom tabs. T o secure, bend the tabs 90 degrees.) 182 53 Rubber bush Screw Dashboard DIN Rear -mount Installation using the screw holes on the side of the unit 1. Remove the frame. (Fig. 9) Fig. 9 2. Fastening the unit to the factory radio mounting bracket. (Fig. 10) (Fig. 11) Select a position where the screw holes of the bracket and the screw holes of the head unit become aligned (are fitted), and tighten the screws at 2 places on each side. Use either binding screws (5 à8 mm) or flush surface screws (5 à8 mm), depending on the shape of the screw holes in the bracket . Fig. 10 Fig. 11 Frame Insert the release pin into the hole in the bottom of the frame and pull out to remove the frame. (When reattaching the frame, point the side with a groove downwards and attach it.) Screw Dashboard or Console Factory radio mounting bracket
Installing the Unit on a Left-Hand- Drive Car Note: ⢠When the unit is installed on a right-hand-drive car, the horizontal positions are inverted. 1. Secure inner holder to the inner cir- cumference of the steering wheel with belt. (Fig. 15) ⢠Fit the inner holder to the steering wheel so that the arrow-marked side faces the driver as shown below. Fig. 15 2. Cut the extra portion of the belt at the center of the inner holder. (Fig. 16) Fig. 16 3. Install outer holder on the inner holder and secure with screws. (Fig. 17) ⢠Tighten the screws with the supplied hexago- nal wrench. Fig. 17 4. Install the remote control unit in the holder. (Fig. 18) ⢠When removing the remote control unit from the holder, move the corrugated release sec- tion toward the steering wheel and slide the remote control unit toward you. Fig. 18 WARNING ⢠Avoid installing this unit in such a location where the operation of safety devices such as airbags is prevented by this unit. Otherwise, there is a danger of a fatal accident. ⢠Avoid installing this unit in such a location where the operation of the steering wheel and the gearshift lever may be prevented. Otherwise, it may result in a traffic accident. CAUTION ⢠Installation of this unit requires specialized skills and experience. Installation of this unit should be entrusted to a dealer from whom you purchased this unit. ⢠Install this unit using only the parts supplied with this unit. If other parts are used, this unit may be damaged or could dismount itself, which leads to an accident or trouble. ⢠Install this unit as required by this manual. Failure to do so may cause an accident. ⢠Do not install this unit near the doors where rain- water is likely to be spilled on the unit. Incursion of water into the unit may cause smoke or fire. WARNING ⢠Fix this unit securely to the steering wheel with the belt attached to the unit. If this unit is loose, it dis- turbs driving stability, which may result in a traffic accident. ⢠Do not attach this unit to the outer circumference of the steering wheel. Otherwise, it disturbs dri- ving stability, causing a traffic accident. Always attach this unit to the inner circumference of the steering wheel as shown. (Fig. 14) Note: ⢠Do not install this unit in such a place as may obstruct the driverâÂÂs view. ⢠Since interior layout differs depending on the type of vehicle, the ideal installation location for the unit also differs. When installing the unit, select a location that assures optimum transmission of sig- nals from the unit to the car stereo. Fig. 14 Belt Inner holder Screw Outer holder Release Section Installing the Steering Remote Control Unit <ENGLISH> Installation <ENGLISH> Installing the power box (Fig. 12) The power box has velcro tape on the underside to secure it to the car mat. ⢠Wipe the surface thoroughly before affixing the velcro tape. Fig. 12 About the fixing screws for the front panel (Fig. 13) If you do not operate the Detaching and Replacing the Front Panel Function, use the sup- plied fixing screws and fix the front panel to this unit. Fig. 13 V elcro tape Car mat Fixing screw
Installing the Unit on a Left-Hand- Drive Car Note: ⢠When the unit is installed on a right-hand-drive car, the horizontal positions are inverted. 1. Secure inner holder to the inner cir- cumference of the steering wheel with belt. (Fig. 15) ⢠Fit the inner holder to the steering wheel so that the arrow-marked side faces the driver as shown below. Fig. 15 2. Cut the extra portion of the belt at the center of the inner holder. (Fig. 16) Fig. 16 3. Install outer holder on the inner holder and secure with screws. (Fig. 17) ⢠Tighten the screws with the supplied hexago- nal wrench. Fig. 17 4. Install the remote control unit in the holder. (Fig. 18) ⢠When removing the remote control unit from the holder, move the corrugated release sec- tion toward the steering wheel and slide the remote control unit toward you. Fig. 18 WARNING ⢠Avoid installing this unit in such a location where the operation of safety devices such as airbags is prevented by this unit. Otherwise, there is a danger of a fatal accident. ⢠Avoid installing this unit in such a location where the operation of the steering wheel and the gearshift lever may be prevented. Otherwise, it may result in a traffic accident. CAUTION ⢠Installation of this unit requires specialized skills and experience. Installation of this unit should be entrusted to a dealer from whom you purchased this unit. ⢠Install this unit using only the parts supplied with this unit. If other parts are used, this unit may be damaged or could dismount itself, which leads to an accident or trouble. ⢠Install this unit as required by this manual. Failure to do so may cause an accident. ⢠Do not install this unit near the doors where rain- water is likely to be spilled on the unit. Incursion of water into the unit may cause smoke or fire. WARNING ⢠Fix this unit securely to the steering wheel with the belt attached to the unit. If this unit is loose, it dis- turbs driving stability, which may result in a traffic accident. ⢠Do not attach this unit to the outer circumference of the steering wheel. Otherwise, it disturbs dri- ving stability, causing a traffic accident. Always attach this unit to the inner circumference of the steering wheel as shown. (Fig. 14) Note: ⢠Do not install this unit in such a place as may obstruct the driverâÂÂs view. ⢠Since interior layout differs depending on the type of vehicle, the ideal installation location for the unit also differs. When installing the unit, select a location that assures optimum transmission of sig- nals from the unit to the car stereo. Fig. 14 Belt Inner holder Screw Outer holder Release Section Installing the Steering Remote Control Unit <ENGLISH> Installation <ENGLISH> Installing the power box (Fig. 12) The power box has velcro tape on the underside to secure it to the car mat. ⢠Wipe the surface thoroughly before affixing the velcro tape. Fig. 12 About the fixing screws for the front panel (Fig. 13) If you do not operate the Detaching and Replacing the Front Panel Function, use the sup- plied fixing screws and fix the front panel to this unit. Fig. 13 V elcro tape Car mat Fixing screw